Astra-K, v.11 (rev 4), en-GB - Opel Ireland · 2019. 10. 30. · Owner's Manual. Disregarding the...

Owner's Manual

Introduction .................................... 2In brief ............................................ 6Keys, doors and windows ............ 20Seats, restraints ........................... 46Storage ........................................ 71Instruments and controls ............. 90Lighting ...................................... 136Climate control ........................... 147Driving and operating ................. 157Vehicle care ............................... 227Service and maintenance .......... 276Technical data ........................... 280Customer information ................ 297Index .......................................... 306

Contents

2 Introduction

Introduction

Introduction 3

Vehicle specific dataPlease enter your vehicle's data onthe previous page to keep it easilyaccessible. This information isavailable in the sections "Service andmaintenance" and "Technical data"as well as on the identification plate.

IntroductionYour vehicle is a designedcombination of advanced technology,safety, environmental friendlinessand economy.This Owner's Manual provides youwith all the necessary information toenable you to drive your vehiclesafely and efficiently.Make sure your passengers areaware of the possible risk of accidentand injury which may result fromimproper use of the vehicle.You must always comply with thespecific laws and regulations of thecountry that you are in. These lawsmay differ from the information in thisOwner's Manual.Disregarding the description given inthis manual may affect your warranty.

When this Owner's Manual refers to aworkshop visit, we recommend yourOpel Service Partner.For gas vehicles we recommend anOpel Repairer authorised forservicing gas vehicles.All Opel Service Partners providefirst-class service at reasonableprices. Experienced mechanicstrained by Opel work according tospecific Opel instructions.The customer literature pack shouldalways be kept ready to hand in thevehicle.

Using this manual● This manual describes all options

and features available for thismodel. Certain descriptions,including those for display andmenu functions, may not apply toyour vehicle due to modelvariant, country specifications,special equipment oraccessories.

● The "In brief" section will give youan initial overview.

● The table of contents at thebeginning of this manual andwithin each section shows wherethe information is located.

● The index will enable you tosearch for specific information.

● This Owner's Manual depicts left-hand drive vehicles. Operation issimilar for right-hand drivevehicles.

● The Owner's Manual uses theengine identifier code. Thecorresponding sales designationand engineering code can befound in the section "Technicaldata".

● Directional data, e.g. left or right,or front or back, always relate tothe direction of travel.

● Displays may not support yourspecific language.

● Display messages and interiorlabelling are written in boldletters.

4 Introduction

Danger, Warnings andCautions

9 Danger

Text marked 9 Danger providesinformation on risk of fatal injury.Disregarding this information mayendanger life.

9 Warning

Text marked 9 Warning providesinformation on risk of accident orinjury. Disregarding thisinformation may lead to injury.

Caution

Text marked Caution providesinformation on possible damage tothe vehicle. Disregarding thisinformation may lead to vehicledamage.

SymbolsPage references are indicated with 3.3 means "see page".Page references and index entriesrefer to the indented headings givenin the section table of content.Chronological order to select menuentries in the vehicle personalisationis indicated with I.We wish you many hours ofpleasurable driving.Adam Opel GmbH

Introduction 5

6 In brief

In brief

Initial drive information

Vehicle unlocking

Press c to unlock the doors and loadcompartment. Open the doors bypulling the handles.

Tailgate

5-door Hatchback: to open thetailgate, push the touchpad switchbelow the brand emblem.Sports Tourer: to open the tailgate,push the touchpad switch under thetailgate moulding.Radio remote control 3 21.Central locking system 3 24.Electronic key system 3 22.Load compartment 3 30.

In brief 7

Seat adjustmentLongitudinal adjustment

Pull handle, slide seat, releasehandle. Try to move the seat back andforth to ensure that the seat is lockedin place.Seat position 3 47.Manual seat adjustment 3 48.Power seat adjustment 3 50.

Backrests inclination

Turn handwheel. Do not lean onbackrest when adjusting.Seat position 3 47.Manual seat adjustment 3 48.Power seat adjustment 3 50.

Seat height

Lever pumping motionup : seat higherdown : seat lower

Seat position 3 47.Manual seat adjustment 3 48.Power seat adjustment 3 50.

8 In brief

Seat inclination

Press switchtop : front end higherbottom : front end lower

Seat position 3 47.Manual seat adjustment 3 48.Power seat adjustment 3 50.

Head restraint adjustment

Press release button, adjust height,engage.Head restraints 3 46.

Seat belt

Pull out the seat belt and fasten in beltbuckle. The seat belt must not betwisted and must fit close against thebody. The backrest must not be tiltedback too far (maximum approx. 25°).To unfasten belt, press red button onbelt buckle.Seat position 3 47, Seat belts3 56, Airbag system 3 58.

In brief 9

Mirror adjustmentInterior mirror

To adjust the mirror, move the mirrorhousing in the desired direction.Manual anti-dazzle interior mirror3 40.Automatic anti-dazzle interior mirror3 41.

Exterior mirrors

Select the relevant exterior mirror byswitching the rocker control to leftmirror (L) or right mirror (R). Adjustrespective mirror by the four-waycontrol.Convex exterior mirrors 3 39,Electric adjustment 3 39, Foldingexterior mirrors 3 39.Heated exterior mirrors 3 40.

Steering wheel adjustment

Unlock the lever, adjust the steeringwheel, then engage the lever andensure it is fully locked.Do not adjust the steering wheelunless the vehicle is stationary andthe steering wheel lock has beenreleased.Airbag system 3 58, Ignitionpositions 3 158.

10 In brief

Instrument panel overview

In brief 11

1 Power windows ..................... 412 Exterior mirrors ..................... 393 Central locking system .......... 244 Side air vents ...................... 1555 Cruise control ..................... 182

Speed limiter ....................... 184Adaptive cruise control ....... 186Forward collision alert ......... 193

6 Turn and lane-changesignals, headlight flash,low/high beam, high beamassist ................................... 142

Exit lighting ......................... 145

Parking lights ...................... 143

Buttons for DriverInformation Centre .............. 115

7 Instruments ........................ 104

Driver Information Centre .... 1158 Buttons for Driver

Information Centre .............. 1159 Forward collision alert

indicator ............................. 193

10 Windscreen wiper andwasher, rear wiper andwasher ................................. 92

11 Centre air vents .................. 15512 Info-Display ........................ 12113 Anti-theft alarm system

status LED ........................... 3614 Hazard warning flashers .... 14115 Glovebox .............................. 7116 CD player17 Controls for Info-Display

operation ............................. 12118 Climate control system ........ 14819 Fuse box ............................ 248

Power connector .................. 9820 Traction Control system ..... 179

Electronic Stability Control . 180Sport mode ........................ 182Parking assist/Advancedparking assist ..................... 200Lane keep assist ................ 215Eco button for stop-startsystem ................................. 163Fuel selector ....................... 106

21 Manual transmission .......... 173Automatic transmission ...... 169Manual transmissionautomated ........................... 173

22 Power outlet .......................... 9723 Parking brake ...................... 17724 Power button ....................... 15925 Ignition switch ..................... 15826 Steering wheel adjustment . . 9127 Horn ..................................... 9228 Bonnet release lever .......... 22929 Storage compartment ........... 7230 Light switch ........................ 136

Headlight rangeadjustment ......................... 137

Front/rear fog lights ............ 142

Instrument illumination ....... 144

12 In brief

In brief 13

Exterior lighting

AUTO : automatic light controlswitches automaticallybetween daytime runninglight and headlight

8 : sidelights9 : headlights

Automatic light control 3 137.

Fog lightsPress button in light switch:> : front fog lights

ø : rear fog light

Headlight flash, high beam andlow beam

headlight flash : pull leverhigh beam : push leverlow beam : push or pull lever

High beam 3 137.Headlight flash 3 137.LED headlights 3 138.High beam assist 3 138.

Turn and lane-change signals

lever up : right turn signallever down : left turn signal

Turn and lane-change signals3 142, Parking lights 3 143.

14 In brief

Hazard warning flashers

Operated by pressing ¨.Hazard warning flashers 3 141.

Horn

Press j.

Washer and wiper systemsWindscreen wiper

HI : fastLO : slowINT : interval wiping

orautomatic wiping with rainsensor

OFF : off

For single wipe when the wiper is off,press lever down to position 1x.Windscreen wiper 3 92.

In brief 15

Windscreen washer

Pull lever.Windscreen washer system 3 92,Washer fluid 3 232, Wiper bladereplacement 3 234.

Rear window wiper

Turn outer cap to activate the rearwindow wiper:OFF : offINT : intermittent operationON : continuous operation

Rear window washer

Push lever.Washer fluid is sprayed on the rearwindow and the wiper wipes a fewtimes.Rear window wiper/washer 3 94.

16 In brief

Climate controlHeated rear window

The heating is operated by pressingÜ.Heated rear window 3 43.

Heated exterior mirrorsPressing Ü also activates the heatedexterior mirrors.Heated exterior mirrors 3 40.

Demisting and defrosting thewindows

● Press V: the air distribution isdirected towards the windscreen.

● Set fan speed to highest level.● Set temperature control to

warmest level.● Switch on heated rear window Ü.● Open side air vents as required

and direct them towards the doorwindows.

Heating and ventilation system3 147.Air conditioning system 3 148.

TransmissionManual transmission

Reverse: with the vehicle stationary,depress clutch pedal and press therelease button on the selector leverand engage the gear.Manual transmission 3 173.

In brief 17

Automatic transmission

P : park positionR : reverseN : neutral modeD : automatic modeM : manual mode< : upshift] : downshift

The selector lever can only be movedout of P when the ignition is on andthe brake pedal is applied. To engageP or R, press the release button.Automatic transmission 3 169.

Manual transmission automated

N : neutral positionD : automatic modeM : manual mode< : upshift] : downshiftR : reverse

Engage reverse only whenvehicle is stationary.

Manual transmission automated3 173.

Starting offCheck before starting off● tyre pressure and condition

3 254, 3 293● Engine oil level and fluid levels

3 230.● All windows, mirrors, exterior

lighting and number plates arefree from dirt, snow and ice andare operational.

● Proper position of mirrors, seats,and seat belts 3 39, 3 47,3 57.

● Brake function at low speed,particularly if the brakes are wet.

18 In brief

Starting the engine

● Ignition switch: turn key toposition 2.Power button: pressEngine Start/Stop for a fewseconds until green LEDilluminates.

● Move the steering wheel slightlyto release the steering wheellock.

● Manual transmission: operateclutch and brake pedal.Manual transmission automated:operate brake pedal.

Automatic transmission: operatebrake pedal and move selectorlever to P or N.

● Do not operate accelerator pedal.● Diesel engines: wait until control

indicator ! for preheatingextinguishes.

● Ignition switch: turn key toposition 3 and release.

Power button: pressEngine Start/Stop and release.

Starting the engine 3 161.

Stop-start system

If the vehicle is at a low speed or at astandstill and certain conditions arefulfilled, an Autostop is activated.An Autostop is indicated by theneedle at the AUTOSTOP position inthe tachometer.A restart is indicated by the needle atthe idle speed position in thetachometer.Stop-start system 3 163.

In brief 19

Parking

9 Warning

● Do not park the vehicle on aneasily ignitable surface. Thehigh temperature of theexhaust system could ignite thesurface.

● Always apply the parkingbrake. Activate the manualparking brake without pressingthe release button. Apply asfirmly as possible on a downhillslope or uphill slope. Depressbrake pedal at the same time toreduce operating force.For vehicles with electricparking brake, pull switch m fora minimum of one second untilcontrol indicator m illuminatesconstantly and electric parkingbrake is applied 3 111.

● Switch off the engine.● If the vehicle is on a level

surface or uphill slope, engagefirst gear or set the selector

lever to position P beforeremoving the ignition key orswitching off ignition onvehicles with power button. Onan uphill slope, turn the frontwheels away from the kerb.If the vehicle is on a downhillslope, engage reverse gear orset the selector lever to positionP before removing the ignitionkey or switching off ignition onvehicles with power button.Turn the front wheels towardsthe kerb.

● Close the windows and thesunroof.

● Remove the ignition key fromthe ignition switch or switch offignition on vehicles with powerbutton. Turn the steering wheeluntil the steering wheel lock isfelt to engage.For vehicles with automatictransmission, the key can onlybe removed when the selectorlever is in position P.

For vehicles with manualtransmission automated, thekey can only be removed fromthe ignition switch when theparking brake is applied.

● Lock the vehicle with e on theradio remote control.Activate the anti-theft alarmsystem 3 36.

● The engine cooling fans may runafter the engine has beenswitched off 3 229.

Caution

After running at high enginespeeds or with high engine loads,operate the engine briefly at a lowload or run in neutral forapprox. 30 seconds beforeswitching off, in order to protectthe turbocharger.

Keys, locks 3 20, Laying-up thevehicle for a long period of time3 228.

20 Keys, doors and windows

Keys, doors andwindows

Keys, locks ................................... 20Keys .......................................... 20Radio remote control ................. 21Electronic key system ................ 22Memorised settings ................... 24Central locking system .............. 24Automatic locking ...................... 29Child locks ................................. 30

Doors ........................................... 30Load compartment .................... 30

Vehicle security ............................ 36Anti-theft locking system ........... 36Anti-theft alarm system .............. 36Immobiliser ................................ 38

Exterior mirrors ............................ 39Convex shape ........................... 39Electric adjustment .................... 39Folding mirrors .......................... 39Heated mirrors ........................... 40

Interior mirrors ............................. 40Manual anti-dazzle .................... 40Automatic anti-dazzle ................ 41

Windows ...................................... 41Windscreen ............................... 41Manual windows ........................ 41Power windows ......................... 41Heated rear window .................. 43Sun visors .................................. 43

Roof ............................................. 44Sunroof ...................................... 44

Keys, locksKeys

Caution

Do not attach heavy or bulky itemsto the ignition key.

Replacement keysThe key number is specified on adetachable tag.The key number must be quotedwhen ordering replacement keys as itis a component of the immobilisersystem.Locks 3 273, Central locking 3 24,Starting the engine 3 161.Radio remote control 3 21.Electronic key 3 22.The code number of the adapter forthe locking wheel nuts is specified ona card. It must be quoted whenordering a replacement adapter.Wheel changing 3 264.

Keys, doors and windows 21

Key with foldaway key section

Press button to extend. To fold thekey, first press the button.

Radio remote control

Enables operation of the followingfunctions via the use of the remotecontrol buttons:● central locking system 3 24● anti-theft locking system 3 36● anti-theft alarm system 3 36● power windows 3 41● sunroof 3 44

The remote control has a range of upto 100 metres, but may also be muchless due to external influences. Thehazard warning flashers confirmoperation.

Handle with care, protect frommoisture and high temperatures andavoid unnecessary operation.

Replacing battery in radio remotecontrolReplace the battery as soon as therange reduces.

Batteries do not belong in householdwaste. They must be disposed of atan appropriate recycling collectionpoint.


1. Insert flat screwdriver into the slotand separate the back cover fromthe remote control by slightlyturning the screwdriver.

2. Remove and replace battery. UseCR 2032 or equivalent battery.Pay attention to the installationposition.

3. Insert the back cover in the areaof the key blade, fold down andclose.

FaultIf the central locking system cannotbe operated with the radio remotecontrol, the cause may be one of thefollowing:● Fault in radio remote control.● The range is exceeded.● The battery voltage is too low.● Frequent, repeated operation of

the radio remote control while notin range, which will require re-synchronisation.

● Overload of the central lockingsystem by operating at frequentintervals, the power supply isinterrupted for a short time.

● Interference from higher-powerradio waves from other sources.

Manual unlocking 3 24.

Electronic key system

Enables a keyless operation of thefollowing functions:● central locking system 3 24● power tailgate 3 30● ignition switching on and starting

the engine 3 161The electronic key simply needs to beon the driver's person.Additionally, the electronic keyincludes the functionality of the radioremote control 3 21.Handle with care, protect frommoisture and high temperatures andavoid unnecessary operation.


NoteDo not put the electronic key into theload compartment or in front of theInfo-Display.

Replacing battery in electronickeyReplace the battery as soon as thesystem no longer operates properlyor the range is reduced. The need forbattery replacement is indicated by amessage in the Driver InformationCentre 3 123.


To replace:

1. Press button at the back of theelectronic key unit and extract thekey blade from the housing.

2. Insert the key blade again forapprox. 6 mm and turn the key toopen the housing. Furtherinsertion of the key blade candamage the housing.

3. Remove and replace battery. UseCR 2032 or equivalent battery.Pay attention to the installationposition.

4. Close the housing and insert keyblade.


Electronic key synchronisationThe electronic key synchronises itselfautomatically during every startingprocedure.


FaultIf the central locking cannot beoperated or the engine cannot bestarted, the cause may be one of thefollowing:● Fault in electronic key.● Electronic key is out of reception

range.● The battery voltage is too low.● Overload of the central locking

system by operating at frequentintervals, the power supply isinterrupted for a short time.

● Interference from higher-powerradio waves from other sources.

To rectify the cause of the fault,change the position of the electronickey.Manual unlocking 3 24.

Memorised settingsWhenever the ignition is switched off,the following settings areautomatically memorised by theremote control unit or the electronickey:

● automatic climate control● lighting● Infotainment system● central locking system● Sport mode settings● comfort settings

The saved settings are automaticallyused the next time the ignition isswitched on with the memorised keyof the remote control unit 3 158 orelectronic key 3 22.A precondition is that Personalisationby Driver is activated in the personalsettings of the Info-Display. This mustbe set for each remote control unit orelectronic key which is used. Thestatus change is available only afterlocking and unlocking the vehicle.The assigned memory position of thepower seat is automatically recalledwhen switching on ignition and AutoMemory Recall is activated in theInfo-Display for the memorisedremote control or electronic key.Power seat 3 50.Vehicle personalisation 3 125.

Central locking systemUnlocks and locks doors, loadcompartment and fuel filler flap.A pull on an interior door handleunlocks the respective door. Pullingthe handle once more opens the door.NoteIn the event of an accident in whichairbags or belt pretensioners aredeployed, the vehicle isautomatically unlocked.NoteA short time after unlocking with theremote control the doors are lockedautomatically if no door has beenopened. A precondition is that thesetting is activated in the vehiclepersonalisation 3 125.


Remote control operation

Unlocking

Press c.Unlocking mode can be set in thevehicle personalisation menu in theInfo-Display. Two settings areselectable:● All doors, load compartment and

fuel filler flap will be unlocked bypressing c once.

● Only the driver's door, loadcompartment and fuel filler flapwill be unlocked by pressing conce. To unlock all doors, pressc twice.

Select the relevant setting in Settings,I Vehicle in the Info-Display.Info-Display 3 121.Vehicle personalisation 3 125.The setting can be saved for theremote control being used.Memorised settings 3 24.Unlocking and opening the tailgate3 30.

LockingClose doors, load compartment andfuel filler flap.

Press e.

If the driver's door is not closedproperly, the central locking systemwill not work.

ConfirmationOperation of the central lockingsystem is confirmed by the hazardwarning flashers. A precondition isthat the setting is activated in thevehicle personalisation 3 125.

Electronic key system operation

The electronic key must be outsidethe vehicle, within a range of approx.one metre of the relevant door side.


Unlocking

Press the button on the respectiveexterior door handle and pull thehandle.Unlocking mode can be set in thevehicle personalisation menu in theInfo-Display. Two settings areselectable:● All doors, load compartment and

fuel filler flap will be unlocked bypressing the button on anyexterior handle once.

● Only the driver's door, loadcompartment and fuel filler flapwill be unlocked by pressing the

button on the driver's doorexterior handle once. To unlockall doors, press button twice.

The setting can be changed in themenu Settings in the Info-Display.Vehicle personalisation 3 125.

Locking

Press the button on any exterior doorhandle.All doors, load compartment and fuelfiller flap will be locked.

The system locks if any of thefollowing occurs:● It has been more than

five seconds since unlocking.● The button on an exterior handle

has been pressed twice withinfive seconds to unlock thevehicle.

● Any door has been opened andall doors are now closed.

If the driver's door is not closedproperly, the electronic key remains inthe vehicle or the ignition is not off,locking will not be permitted.If there have been two or moreelectronic keys in the vehicle and theignition was on once, the doors will belocked even if just one electronic keyis taken out of the vehicle.

Unlocking and opening the tailgateThe tailgate can be unlocked andopened handsfree via moving the footbelow the rear bumper or by pushingthe touchpad switch under the brandemblem when the electronic key is inrange. The doors remain locked.Load compartment 3 30.


Operation with buttons on theelectronic key

The central locking system can alsobe operated with the buttons on theelectronic key.Press c to unlock.Press e to lock.Press X twice to unlock and openonly the power tailgate. To preventunintended opening of the tailgate,X must be pressed longer thanduring locking or unlocking.Remote control operation 3 24.

Passive lockingAutomatic locking 3 29.

ConfirmationOperation of central locking system isconfirmed by the hazard warningflashers. A precondition is that thesetting is activated in the vehiclepersonalisation 3 125.

Central locking buttonsLocks or unlocks all doors, the loadcompartment and fuel filler flap fromthe passenger compartment via aswitch in the driver's door panel.

Press e to lock.Press c to unlock.

Operation with the key in case ofa central locking system faultIn case of a fault, e.g. vehicle batteryor remote control/electronic keybattery is discharged, the driver'sdoor can be locked or unlocked withthe mechanical key.The lock cylinder in the driver's dooris covered by a cap.

Remote control: to remove the cap,insert the key into the recess at thebottom of the cap and swivel the keyupward.Keys 3 20.


Electronic key: to remove the cap,press button at the back and extractthe key blade from the housing. Insertthe key into the recess at the bottomof the cap and swivel the key upward.Electronic key system 3 22.

Manual unlocking

Manually unlock the driver's door byinserting and turning the key in thelock cylinder.The other doors can be opened bypulling the interior handle twice or bypressing c in the driver's door panel.The load compartment and fuel fillerflap will possibly not be unlocked.By switching on the ignition, the anti-theft locking system is deactivated.

Manual locking

Push inside locking knob of all doorsexcept driver's door or press e in thedriver's door panel. Then close thedriver's door and lock it from theoutside by turning the key in the lockcylinder. The fuel filler flap andtailgate are possibly not locked.


After locking, cover the lock cylinderwith the cap: insert the cap with thelower side in the recesses, swivel andpush the cap until it engages at theupper side.

Automatic lockingAutomatic locking after driving offThis security feature can beconfigured to automatically lock alldoors, load compartment and fuelfiller flap after driving off andexceeding a certain speed.

When at a standstill after driving, thevehicle will be unlocked automaticallyas soon as the key is removed fromthe ignition switch, or with electronickey system when the ignition isswitched off.Activation or deactivation ofautomatic locking can be set in themenu Settings, I Vehicle in the Info-Display.Info-Display 3 121.Vehicle personalisation 3 125.The setting can be saved for theremote control or electronic key beingused 3 24.

Automatic relock after unlockingThis feature can be configured toautomatically lock all doors, loadcompartment and fuel filler flap ashort time after unlocking with theremote control or electronic key,provided no door has been opened.Activation or deactivation ofautomatic relock can be set in themenu Settings, I Vehicle in the Info-Display.Info-Display 3 121.

Vehicle personalisation 3 125.The setting can be saved for theremote control or electronic key beingused 3 24.

Passive lockingOn vehicles with electronic keysystem, this feature locks the vehicleautomatically after several seconds ifan electronic key has beenrecognised previously inside thevehicle, all doors have then beenclosed and the electronic key doesnot remain within the vehicle.If the electronic key remains in thevehicle or the ignition is not off,passive locking will not be permitted.If there have been two or moreelectronic keys in the vehicle and theignition was on once, the featurelocks the vehicle if just one electronickey is taken out of the vehicle.To prevent passive locking of thevehicle e.g. when refuelling or ifpassengers remain in the vehicle, thesystem must be disabled.


To disable the system, press thecentral locking button c for a fewseconds while one door is open. Anacoustic signal sounds three times toconfirm deactivation. The functionremains disabled until the centrallocking button e is pressed or theignition is switched on.Activation or deactivation of passivelocking can be set in the menuSettings, I Vehicle in the Info-Display.Info-Display 3 121.Vehicle personalisation 3 125.The setting can be saved for theelectronic key being used 3 24.

Child locks

9 Warning

Use the child locks wheneverchildren are occupying the rearseats.

Move the pin in the rear door to thefront. The door cannot be openedfrom the inside.To deactivate, move the pin to therear position.

DoorsLoad compartmentTailgate

Opening5-door Hatchback

After unlocking, push the touchpadswitch under the brand emblem andopen the tailgate.


Sports Tourer

After unlocking, push the touchpadswitch under the tailgate mouldingand open the tailgate manually.Central locking system 3 24.

Closing

Use one of the interior handles.Do not push the touchpad switchwhilst closing as this will unlock thetailgate again.Central locking system 3 24.

Power tailgate

9 Warning

Take care when operating thepower tailgate. Risk of injury,particularly to children.

Keep a close watch on themovable tailgate when operating.Ensure that nothing becomestrapped during operating and noone is standing within the movingarea.

The power tailgate can be operatedby:● Pressing X twice on the

electronic key. To preventunintended opening of thetailgate, X must be pressedlonger than during locking orunlocking.

● Handsfree operation with motionsensor below the rear bumper.

● The touchpad switch under theexterior tailgate moulding andC in the open tailgate.

● The switch C on the inside ofthe driver's door.

On vehicles with automatictransmission, the tailgate can only beoperated when the vehicle isstationary and with selector lever in P.


The turn signal lights flash and achime sounds when the powertailgate is operating.NoteOperating the power tailgate doesnot operate the central lockingsystem. To open the tailgate with thebutton on the electronic key, or withthe touchpad switch under thetailgate moulding or via handsfreeoperation, it is not necessary tounlock the vehicle. A precondition isthat the electronic key is outside thevehicle, within a range of approx.one metre of the tailgate.Do not leave the electronic key in theload compartment.Lock the vehicle after closing if it wasunlocked previously.

Central locking system 3 24.

Operation with the electronic key

Press X twice to open or close thetailgate. To prevent unintendedopening of the tailgate, X must bepressed longer than during locking orunlocking.

Handsfree operation with motionsensor below the rear bumper

To open or close the tailgate, movethe foot below the rear bumper backand forth in the area shown in theillustration. If equipped with parkingassist, the area is recognisable belowthe sensor shown. Do not hold thefoot longer or move too slow belowthe bumper. The electronic key mustbe outside the vehicle, within a rangeof approx. one metre of the tailgate.


9 Danger

Do not touch any vehicle partsbelow the vehicle duringhandsfree operation. There is arisk of injury from hot engine parts.

Operation with the touchpad switchunder the exterior tailgate moulding

To open the tailgate, press thetouchpad switch under the tailgatemoulding until the tailgate starts tomove. If the vehicle is locked, theelectronic key must be outside thevehicle, within a range of approx.one metre of the tailgate.

To close, press C in the opentailgate until the tailgate starts tomove.

Operation with the switch on theinside of the driver's door

Press C on the inside of the driver'sdoor until the tailgate starts to open orclose.

Stop or change direction ofmovementTo stop movement of the tailgateimmediately:● press X once on the electronic

key, or● press the touchpad switch under

the exterior tailgate moulding, or


● press C on the open tailgate,or

● press C on the inside of thedriver's door.

Pressing one of the switches againwill reverse the direction ofmovement.

Operation modesThe power tailgate has three modesof operation, which are controlled bythe switch C in the driver's door. Tochange the mode, turn the switch:

● Normal mode MAX: Powertailgate opens to full height.

● Intermediate mode 3/4: Powertailgate opens to a reducedheight that can be adjusted.

● Mode Off: Tailgate can only beoperated manually.

Adjust reduced opening height inintermediate mode1. Turn operation mode switch to

3/4.2. Open power tailgate with any

operation switch.3. Stop movement at the desired

height by pressing any operationswitch. If required, manually movethe stopped tailgate to the desiredposition.

4. Press and hold the button C onthe inside of the open tailgate forthree seconds.

NoteAdjusting opening height should beprogrammed at ground level.

A chime sound indicates the newsetting and the turn signal lights willflash. The reduced height can only setat an opening angle of above 30°.When turning the adjuster wheel inthe driver's door to intermediate mode3/4, the power tailgate will stopopening at the newly set position.


The tailgate can only be held open ifa minimum height is exceeded(minimum opening angle from 30°).The opening height cannot beprogrammed below that height.

Safety functionIf the power tailgate encounters anobstacle during opening or closing,the direction of movement willautomatically be reversed slightly.Multiple obstacles in one power cyclewill deactivate the function. In thiscase, close or open the tailgatemanually.The power tailgate has pinch sensorson the side edges. If the sensorsdetect obstacles between tailgate andchassis, the tailgate will open, until itis activated again or closed manually.The safety function is indicated by awarning chime.Remove all obstacles beforeresuming normal power operation.If the vehicle is equipped with factory-fitted towing equipment and a traileris electrically connected, the powertailgate can only be opened with the

touchpad switch or closed with G inthe open tailgate. Ensure that thereare no obstacles in the moving area.

OverloadIf the power tailgate is repeatedlyoperated at short intervals, thefunction is disabled for some time.Move tailgate manually into endposition to reset the system.

General hints for operatingtailgate

9 Danger

Do not drive with the tailgate openor ajar, e.g. when transportingbulky objects, since toxic exhaustgases, which cannot be seen orsmelled, could enter the vehicle.This can cause unconsciousnessand even death.

Caution

Before opening the tailgate, checkoverhead obstructions, e.g. agarage door, to avoid damage to

the tailgate. Always check themoving area above and behind thetailgate.

NoteThe installation of certain heavyaccessories onto the tailgate mayaffect its ability to remain open.NoteThe operation of the power tailgateis disabled under low vehicle batteryconditions. In this case, the tailgatemay not even by manually operable.NoteWith the power tailgate disabled andall doors unlocked, the tailgate canonly be operated manually. In thisevent, manually closing the tailgaterequires significantly greater force.NoteAt low outside temperatures thetailgate may not open fully by itself.In this event, lift the tailgate manuallyto its normal end position.


Vehicle securityAnti-theft locking system

9 Warning

Do not use the system if there arepeople in the vehicle! The doorscannot be unlocked from theinside.

The system deadlocks all the doors.All doors must be closed otherwisethe system cannot be activated.Unlocking the vehicle disables themechanical anti-theft locking system.This is not possible with the centrallocking button.

Activating

Press e on the radio remote controltwice within five seconds.

Anti-theft alarm systemThe anti-theft alarm system iscombined with the anti-theft lockingsystem.It monitors:● doors, tailgate, bonnet● passenger compartment

including adjoining loadcompartment

● vehicle inclination, e.g. if it israised

● ignition

ActivationAll doors must be closed and theelectronic key of the electronic keysystem must not remain in thevehicle. Otherwise the system cannotbe activated.● Radio remote control: self-

activated 30 seconds afterlocking the vehicle by pressing eonce.

● Electronic key system: self-activated 30 seconds afterlocking the vehicle by pressingthe button on any exterior doorhandle.


● Radio remote control orelectronic key: directly bypressing e twice withinfive seconds.

● Electronic key system withpassive locking enabled: brieflyactivated after passive lockingoccurs.

NoteChanges to the vehicle interior suchas the use of seat covers, and openwindows or sunroof, could impair thefunction of passenger compartmentmonitoring.

Activation without monitoring ofpassenger compartment andvehicle inclination

Switch off the monitoring ofpassenger compartment and vehicleinclination when animals are beingleft in the vehicle, because of highvolume ultrasonic signals ormovements triggering the alarm. Alsoswitch off when the vehicle is on aferry or train.1. Close tailgate, bonnet, windows

and sunroof.2. Press o. LED in the button o

illuminates for a maximum often minutes.

3. Close doors.4. Activate the anti-theft alarm

system.Status message is displayed in theDriver Information Centre.

Status LED

Status LED is integrated in the sensoron top of the instrument panel.Status during the first 30 seconds ofanti-theft alarm system activation:LED illuminates : test, arming delayLED flashesquickly

: doors, tailgate orbonnet notcompletely closed,or system fault


Status after system is armed:LED flashesslowly

: system is armed

Seek the assistance of a workshop inthe event of faults.

DeactivationRadio remote control: Unlocking thevehicle by pressing c deactivates theanti-theft alarm system.

Electronic key system: Unlocking thevehicle by pressing the button on anyexterior door handle deactivates theanti-theft alarm system.

The electronic key must be outsidethe vehicle, within a range of approx.one metre of the relevant door side.The system is not deactivated byunlocking the driver's door with thekey or with the central locking buttonin the passenger compartment.

AlarmWhen triggered, the alarm hornsounds and the hazard warning lightsflash simultaneously. The numberand duration of alarm signals arestipulated by legislation.The anti-theft alarm system can bedeactivated by pressing c, bypressing the switch on the doorhandle with electronic key system orswitching on the ignition.A triggered alarm, which has not beeninterrupted by the driver, will beindicated by the hazard warninglights. They will flash quickly threetimes the next time the vehicle isunlocked with the radio remotecontrol. Additionally a warningmessage is displayed in the DriverInformation Centre after switching onthe ignition.

Vehicle messages 3 123.If the vehicle's battery is to bedisconnected (e.g. for maintenancework), the alarm siren must bedeactivated as follows: switch theignition on then off, then disconnectthe vehicle's battery within15 seconds.

ImmobiliserThe system is part of the ignitionswitch and checks whether thevehicle is allowed to be started withthe key being used.The immobiliser is activatedautomatically after the key has beenremoved from the ignition switch.If the control indicator d flashes whenthe ignition is on, there is a fault in thesystem; the engine cannot be started.Switch off the ignition and repeat thestart attempt.If the control indicator d continuesflashing, attempt to start the engineusing the spare key and seek theassistance of a workshop.


NoteRadio Frequency Identification(RFID) tags may cause interferencewith the key. Do not have it placednear the key when starting thevehicle.NoteThe immobiliser does not lock thedoors. You should always lock thevehicle after leaving it and switch onthe anti-theft alarm system 3 24,3 36.

Control indicator d 3 114.

Exterior mirrorsConvex shapeThe convex exterior mirror on thedriver's side contains an asphericalarea and reduces blind spots. Theshape of the mirror makes objectsappear smaller, which will affect theability to estimate distances.Side blind spot alert 3 207.

Electric adjustment

Select the relevant exterior mirror byswitching the control to left (L) or right(R). Then swivel the control to adjustthe mirror.In position o no mirror is selected.

Folding mirrors

For pedestrian safety, the exteriormirrors will swing out of their normalmounting position if they are struckwith sufficient force. Reposition themirror by applying slight pressure tothe mirror housing.


Electric folding

Switch control to o, then push thecontrol c down. Both exterior mirrorswill fold.Push the control down again - bothexterior mirrors return to their originalposition.If an electrically folded mirror ismanually extended, pressing downthe control will only electrically extendthe other mirror.

Heated mirrors

Operated by pressing Ü.Heating works with the enginerunning and is switched offautomatically after a short time.

Interior mirrorsManual anti-dazzle

To reduce dazzle, adjust the lever onthe underside of the mirror housing.


Automatic anti-dazzle

Dazzle from following vehicles atnight is automatically reduced.

WindowsWindscreenWindscreen stickersDo not attach stickers such as tollroad stickers or similar on thewindscreen in the area of the interiormirror. Otherwise the detection zoneof the sensor and the view area of thecamera in the mirror housing could berestricted.

Windscreen replacement

Caution

If the vehicle has a front-lookingcamera sensor for the driverassistance systems, it is veryimportant that any windscreenreplacement is performedaccurately according to Opelspecifications. Otherwise, thesesystems may not work properlyand there is a risk of unexpectedbehaviour and/or messages fromthese systems.

Manual windowsThe door windows can be opened orclosed with the window cranks.

Power windows

9 Warning

Take care when operating thepower windows. Risk of injury,particularly to children.If there are children on the rearseats, switch on the child safetysystem for the power windows.Keep a close watch on thewindows when closing them.Ensure that nothing becomestrapped in them as they move.

Switch on ignition to operate powerwindows. Retained power off 3 160.


Operate the switch for the respectivewindow by pushing to open or pullingto close.Pushing or pulling gently to the firstdetent: window moves up or down aslong as the switch is operated.Pushing or pulling firmly to the seconddetent then releasing: window movesup or down automatically with safetyfunction enabled. To stop movement,operate the switch once more in thesame direction.

Safety functionIf the window glass encountersresistance above the middle of thewindow during automatic closing, it isimmediately stopped and openedagain.

Override safety functionIn the event of closing difficulties dueto frost or the like, switch on theignition, then pull the switch to the firstdetent and hold. The window movesup without safety function enabled.To stop movement, release theswitch.

Child safety system for rearwindows

Press z to deactivate rear doorpower windows; the LED illuminates.To activate, press z again.

Operating windows from outsideThe windows can be operatedremotely from outside the vehicle.


Press and hold c to open windows.Press and hold e to close windows.Release button to stop windowmovement.If the windows are fully opened orclosed, the hazard warning lights willflash twice.

OverloadIf the windows are repeatedlyoperated within short intervals, thewindow operation is disabled forsome time.

Initialising the power windowsIf the windows cannot be closedautomatically (e.g. afterdisconnecting the vehicle battery), awarning message is displayed in theDriver Information Centre.Vehicle messages 3 123.Activate the window electronics asfollows:1. Close doors.2. Switch on ignition.3. Pull switch until the window is

closed and keep pulling foradditional two seconds.

4. Push switch until the window iscompletely open and keeppushing for additionaltwo seconds.

5. Repeat for each window.

Heated rear window

Operated by pressing Ü.Heating works with the enginerunning and is switched offautomatically after a short time.

Sun visorsThe sun visors can be folded down orswivelled to the side to preventdazzling.The covers of the mirrors should beclosed when driving.A ticket holder is located on thebackside of the sun visor.


RoofSunroof

9 Warning

Take care when operating thesunroof. Risk of injury, particularlyto children.Keep a close watch on themovable parts when operatingthem. Ensure that nothingbecomes trapped in them as theymove.

Switch on ignition to operate thesunroof.

Open or closePress p or r gently to the firstdetent: sunroof is opened or closedas long as the switch is operated.Press p or r firmly to the seconddetent then release: the sunroof isopened or closed automatically.During closing the safety function isenabled. To stop movement, operatethe switch once more.

Raise or closePress q or r: sunroof is raised orclosed automatically. During closingthe safety function is enabled.

SunblindThe sunblind is manually operated.Close or open the sunblind by sliding.When the sunroof is open, thesunblind is always open.

General hints

Safety functionIf the sunroof encounters resistanceduring automatic closing, it isimmediately stopped and openedagain.

Override safety functionIn the event of closing difficulties, e.g.due to frost, hold the switch rpressed to the second detent. Thesunroof closes with safety functiondisabled. To stop movement, releasethe switch.

Closing sunroof from outsideThe sunroof can be closed remotelyfrom outside the vehicle.


Press and hold e to close the sunroof.Release the button to stop themovement.

Initialising after a power failureAfter a power failure, it may only bepossible to operate the sunroof to alimited extent. Have the systeminitialised by your workshop.

46 Seats, restraints

Seats, restraints

Head restraints ............................ 46Front seats ................................... 47

Seat position .............................. 47Manual seat adjustment ............ 48Power seat adjustment .............. 50Armrest ...................................... 53Heating ...................................... 54Ventilating .................................. 54Massage .................................... 55

Rear seats ................................... 55Armrest ...................................... 55Heating ...................................... 56

Seat belts ..................................... 56Three-point seat belt ................. 57

Airbag system .............................. 58Front airbag system ................... 62Side airbag system .................... 62Curtain airbag system ............... 63Airbag deactivation .................... 63

Child restraints ............................. 65Child restraint systems .............. 65Child restraint installationlocations ................................... 67

Head restraints

Position

9 Warning

Only drive with the head restraintset to the proper position.

The upper edge of the head restraintshould be at upper head level. If thisis not possible for extremely tallpeople, set to highest position, andset to lowest position for small people.

Adjustment

Head restraints on front seats

Height adjustmentPress release button, adjust height,engage.

Seats, restraints 47

Head restraints on rear seats

Height adjustmentPull the head restraint upwards orpress the catch to release and pushthe head restraint downwards.

Removal of rear head restraintsE.g. for load compartment extension3 73.

Press both catches, pull the headrestraint upwards and remove.

Front seatsSeat position

9 Warning

Only drive with the seat correctlyadjusted.

9 Danger

Do not sit closer than 25 cm to thesteering wheel, to permit safeairbag deployment.

9 Warning

Never adjust seats while driving asthey could move uncontrollably.

9 Warning

Never store any objects under theseats.


● Sit with buttocks as far backagainst the backrest as possible.Adjust the distance between theseat and the pedals so that legsare slightly angled when fullypressing the pedals. Slide thefront passenger seat as far backas possible.

● Set seat height high enough tohave a clear field of vision on allsides and of all displayinstruments. There should be atleast one hand of clearancebetween head and the roofframe. Your thighs should restlightly on the seat withoutpressing into it.

● Sit with shoulders as far backagainst the backrest as possible.Set the backrest rake so that it ispossible to easily reach thesteering wheel with arms slightlybent. Maintain contact betweenshoulders and the backrest whenturning the steering wheel. Donot angle the backrest too farback. We recommend amaximum rake of approx. 25°.

● Adjust seat and steering wheel ina way that the wrist rests on topof the steering wheel while thearm is fully extended andshoulders on the backrest.

● Adjust the steering wheel 3 91.● Adjust the head restraint 3 46.● Adjust the thigh support so that

there is a space approx. twofingers wide between the edge ofthe seat and the hollow of theknee.

● Adjust the lumbar support so thatit supports the natural shape ofthe spine.

Manual seat adjustmentDrive only with engaged seats andbackrests.

Longitudinal adjustment

Pull handle, slide seat, releasehandle. Try to move the seat back andforth to ensure that the seat is lockedin place.


Backrest inclination

Turn handwheel. Do not lean onbackrest when adjusting.

Seat height

Lever pumping motionup : seat higherdown : seat lower

Seat inclination

Press switchtop : front end higherbottom : front end lower


Lumbar support

Adjust lumbar support using the four-way switch to suit personalrequirements.Moving support up and down: pushswitch up or down.Increasing and decreasing support:push switch forwards or backwards.

Adjustable thigh support

Pull the lever and slide the thighsupport.

Power seat adjustment

9 Warning

Care must be taken whenoperating the power seats. Thereis a risk of injury, particularly forchildren. Objects could becometrapped.

Keep a close watch on the seatswhen adjusting them. Vehiclepassengers should be informedaccordingly.

Longitudinal adjustment

Move switch forwards/backwards.


Seat height

Move switch upwards/downwards.

Seat inclination

Tilt front of switch upwards/downwards.

Backrest inclination

Tilt switch forwards/backwards.

Lumbar support

Adjust lumbar support using thefour-way switch to suit personalrequirements.Moving support up and down: pushswitch up or down.Increasing and decreasing support:push switch forwards or backwards.


Adjustable thigh support

Pull the lever and slide the thighsupport.

Side bolster

Adjust seat backrest width to suitpersonal requirements.Press e to reduce backrest width.Press d to increase backrest width.

Memory function for power seatadjustmentTwo different driver's seat settingscan be stored.Memorised settings 3 24, Vehiclepersonalisation 3 125.

Storing memory position● Adjust driver's seat to desired

position.● Press and hold MEM and 1 or 2

simultaneously until a chimesounds.

Recall of memory positionsPress and hold 1 or 2 until the storedseat position has been reached.Releasing the button during seatmovement cancels the recall.

Automatic recall of memory positionsMemory positions are assigned to thedriver (1 or 2) using the respective keyand are automatically recalled when


the ignition is switched on. In addition,a message in the Driver InformationCentre indicates the driver number,identified by the used key. If theignition is switched on more thanthree subsequent times with thesame key, the message will not bedisplayed again until another key isbeing used.To stop recall movement, press oneof the memory or power seat controls.Precondition is that Personalisationby Driver and Auto Memory Recall isactivated in the personal settings ofthe Info-Display.This function can be activated ordeactivated in the vehiclepersonalisation.Select the relevant setting in theVehicle menu in the Info-Display.Info-Display 3 121.Vehicle personalisation 3 125.

Easy exit functionFor a convenient exit out of thevehicle, the power driver seat movesrearwards when vehicle is stationary.

To activate the easy exit function:● set selector lever to position P

(automatic transmission)● apply parking brake (manual

transmission)● switch off ignition● remove key from the ignition

switch● open the driver's door

If the door is already open, switch offignition to activate easy exit.To stop movement, press one of thememory or power seat controls.This function can be activated ordeactivated in the vehiclepersonalisation.Select the relevant setting in theVehicle menu in the Info-Display.Info-Display 3 121.Vehicle personalisation 3 125.

Safety functionIf the driver's seat encountersresistance during movement, therecall may stop. After removing theobstruction, press and hold theappropriate memory position button

for two seconds. Try recalling thememory position again. If the recalldoes not operate, consult aworkshop.

OverloadIf the seat setting is electricallyoverloaded, the power supply isautomatically cut-off for a short time.NoteAfter an accident in which airbagshave been deployed, the memoryfunction for each position button willbe deactivated.

Armrest


The armrest can be slid forwards by10 cm. Under the armrest there is astorage compartment.Armrest storage 3 72.

Heating

Adjust heating to the desired settingby pressing ß for the respective seatone or more times. The controlindicator in the button indicates thesetting.Prolonged use of the highest settingfor people with sensitive skin is notrecommended.

The seat heating will be reducedautomatically from highest level tomedium level after 30 minutes.Seat heating is operational whenengine is running and during anAutostop.Stop-start system 3 163.

Automatic seat heatingDepending on the equipment, theautomatic seat heating can beenabled in the vehicle personalisationmenu in the Info-Display.Vehicle personalisation 3 125.When enabled, the heating of theseats will be activated automaticallyat vehicle start. The activation isbased on several parameters such asvehicle interior temperature, intensityand direction of the sun andtemperature setting of the electronicclimate control system for the driverand passenger side.As the vehicle’s interior warms up, theseat heating level will be reducedautomatically until it finally goes off.

The seat heating level being providedduring the automatic operation isshown by heated seat indicator lights.If the passenger seat is unoccupied,the automatic seat heating feature willnot activate the seat heating for thatseat.The seat heating buttons can bepressed at any time to exit theautomatic seat heating for therespective seat and control the seatheating manually instead.

Ventilating


Adjust ventilating to the desiredsetting by pressing A for therespective seat one or more times.The control indicator in the buttonindicates the setting.Ventilated seats are operational whenengine is running and during anAutostop.Stop-start system 3 163.

Massage

Press c to switch on the backmassage function.To switch off, press c again.

After ten minutes the massagefunction is switched off automatically. Rear seats

Armrest

Fold armrest down.


Heating

Activate seat heating by pressing ßfor the respective rear outer seat.Activation is indicated by the LED inthe button.Press ß once more to deactivate seatheating.Prolonged use for people withsensitive skin is not recommended.Seat heating is operational whenengine is running and during anAutostop.Stop-start system 3 163.

Seat belts

The seat belts are locked duringheavy acceleration or deceleration ofthe vehicle, holding the occupants inthe seat position. Thereby the risk ofinjury is considerably reduced.

9 Warning

Fasten seat belt before each trip.In the event of an accident, peoplenot wearing seat belts endangertheir fellow occupants andthemselves.

Seat belts are designed to be used byonly one person at a time. Childrestraint system 3 65.Periodically check all parts of the beltsystem for damage, soiling andproper functionality.Have damaged components replacedby a workshop. After an accident,have the belts and triggered beltpretensioners replaced by aworkshop.NoteMake sure that the belts are notdamaged by shoes or sharp-edgedobjects or trapped. Prevent dirt fromgetting into the belt retractors.

Seat belt reminderEach seat is equipped with a seat beltreminder, indicated for front seats bycontrol indicators X and k, or for rearseats by the symbol X in the DriverInformation Centre 3 109.

Belt force limitersStress on the body is reduced by thegradual release of the belt during acollision.


Belt pretensionersIn the event of a head-on, rear-end orside-on collision of a certain severity,the front and outer rear seat belts aretightened. The front seat belts andouter seat belts are tightened by onepretensioner per seat.

9 Warning

Incorrect handling (e.g. removal orfitting of belts) can trigger the beltpretensioners.

Deployment of the belt pretensionersis indicated by continuous illuminationof control indicator v 3 110.Triggered belt pretensioners must bereplaced by a workshop. Beltpretensioners can only be triggeredonce.NoteDo not affix or install accessories orother objects that may interfere withthe operation of the belt tensioner.Do not make any modification to belttensioner components as this willinvalidate the vehicle operatingpermit.

Three-point seat beltFasten

Withdraw the belt from the retractor,guide it untwisted across the bodyand insert the latch plate into thebuckle. Tighten the lap belt regularlywhilst driving by pulling the shoulderbelt.

Loose or bulky clothing prevents thebelt from fitting snugly. Do not placeobjects such as handbags or mobilephones between the belt and yourbody.

9 Warning

The belt must not rest against hardor fragile objects in the pockets ofyour clothing.

Seat belt reminder X, k 3 109.


Unfasten

To release belt, press red button onbelt buckle.

Using the seat belt while pregnant

9 Warning

The lap belt must be positioned aslow as possible across the pelvisto prevent pressure on theabdomen.

Airbag systemThe airbag system consists of anumber of individual systemsdepending on the scope ofequipment.When triggered, the airbags inflatewithin milliseconds. They also deflateso quickly that it is often unnoticeableduring the collision.

9 Warning

The airbag system deploys in anexplosive manner, repairs must beperformed by skilled personnelonly.

9 Warning

Adding accessories that changethe vehicle's frame, bumpersystem, height, front end or sidesheet metal, may keep the airbagsystem from working properly. Theoperation of the airbag system canalso be affected by changing anyparts of the front seats, seat belts,


airbag sensing and diagnosticmodule, steering wheel,instrument panel, inner door sealsincluding the speakers, any of theairbag modules, ceiling or pillartrim, front sensors, side impactsensors or airbag wiring.

NoteThe airbag systems and beltpretensioner control electronics arelocated in the centre console area.Do not put any magnetic objects inthis area.Do not affix any objects onto theairbag covers and do not cover themwith other materials. Have damagedcovers replaced by a workshop.Each airbag is triggered only once.Have deployed airbags replaced bya workshop. Furthermore, it may benecessary to have the steeringwheel, the instrument panel, parts ofthe panelling, the door seals,handles and the seats replaced.Do not make any modifications tothe airbag system as this willinvalidate the vehicle operatingpermit.

Control indicator v for airbag systems3 110.

Child restraint systems on frontpassenger seat with airbagsystemsWarning according to ECE R94.02:

EN: NEVER use a rearward-facingchild restraint on a seat protected byan ACTIVE AIRBAG in front of it;DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to theCHILD can occur.DE: Nach hinten gerichteteKindersitze NIEMALS auf einem Sitzverwenden, der durch einen davorbefindlichen AKTIVEN AIRBAG

geschützt ist, da dies den TOD oderSCHWERE VERLETZUNGEN DESKINDES zur Folge haben kann.FR: NE JAMAIS utiliser un sièged'enfant orienté vers l'arrière sur unsiège protégé par un COUSSINGONFLABLE ACTIF placé devant lui,sous peine d'infliger desBLESSURES GRAVES, voireMORTELLES à l'ENFANT.ES: NUNCA utilice un sistema deretención infantil orientado haciaatrás en un asiento protegido por unAIRBAG FRONTAL ACTIVO. Peligrode MUERTE o LESIONES GRAVESpara el NIÑO.RU: ЗАПРЕЩАЕТСЯустанавливать детскоеудерживающее устройство лицомназад на сиденье автомобиля,оборудованном фронтальнойподушкой безопасности, еслиПОДУШКА НЕ ОТКЛЮЧЕНА! Этоможет привести к СМЕРТИ илиСЕРЬЕЗНЫМ ТРАВМАМРЕБЕНКА.


NL: Gebruik NOOIT een achterwaartsgericht kinderzitje op een stoel meteen ACTIEVE AIRBAG ervoor, omDODELIJK of ERNSTIG LETSEL vanhet KIND te voorkomen.DA: Brug ALDRIG en bagudvendtautostol på et forsæde med AKTIVAIRBAG, BARNET kan komme iLIVSFARE eller komme ALVORLIGTTIL SKADE.SV: Använd ALDRIG en bakåtvändbarnstol på ett säte som skyddas meden framförvarande AKTIV AIRBAG.DÖDSFALL eller ALLVARLIGASKADOR kan drabba BARNET.FI: ÄLÄ KOSKAAN sijoita taaksepäinsuunnattua lasten turvaistuintaistuimelle, jonka edessä onAKTIIVINEN TURVATYYNY, LAPSIVOI KUOLLA tai VAMMAUTUAVAKAVASTI.NO: Bakovervendtbarnesikringsutstyr må ALDRI brukespå et sete med AKTIVKOLLISJONSPUTE foran, da det kanføre til at BARNET utsettes forLIVSFARE og fare for ALVORLIGESKADER.

PT: NUNCA use um sistema deretenção para crianças voltado paratrás num banco protegido com umAIRBAG ACTIVO na frente domesmo, poderá ocorrer a PERDA DEVIDA ou FERIMENTOS GRAVES naCRIANÇA.IT: Non usare mai un sistema disicurezza per bambini rivoltoall'indietro su un sedile protetto daAIRBAG ATTIVO di fronte ad esso:pericolo di MORTE o LESIONIGRAVI per il BAMBINO!EL: ΠΟΤΕ μη χρησιμοποιείτε παιδικόκάθισμα ασφαλείας με φορά προς ταπίσω σε κάθισμα που προστατεύεταιαπό μετωπικό ΕΝΕΡΓΟ ΑΕΡΟΣΑΚΟ,διότι το παιδί μπορεί να υποστείΘΑΝΑΣΙΜΟ ή ΣΟΒΑΡΟΤΡΑΥΜΑΤΙΣΜΟ.PL: NIE WOLNO montować fotelikadziecięcego zwróconego tyłem dokierunku jazdy na fotelu, przedktórym znajduje się WŁĄCZONAPODUSZKA POWIETRZNA.Niezastosowanie się do tegozalecenia może być przyczynąŚMIERCI lub POWAŻNYCHOBRAŻEŃ u DZIECKA.

TR: Arkaya bakan bir çocuk emniyetsistemini KESİNLİKLE önünde birAKTİF HAVA YASTIĞI ilekorunmakta olan bir koltuktakullanmayınız. ÇOCUK ÖLEBİLİRveya AĞIR ŞEKİLDEYARALANABİLİR.UK: НІКОЛИ не використовуйтесистему безпеки для дітей, щовстановлюється обличчям назад,на сидінні з УВІМКНЕНОЮПОДУШКОЮ БЕЗПЕКИ, інакше цеможе призвести до СМЕРТІ чиСЕРЙОЗНОГО ТРАВМУВАННЯДИТИНИ.HU: SOHA ne használjon hátrafelénéző biztonsági gyerekülést előlrőlAKTÍV LÉGZSÁKKAL védett ülésen,mert a GYERMEK HALÁLÁT vagyKOMOLY SÉRÜLÉSÉT okozhatja.HR: NIKADA nemojte koristiti sustavzadržavanja za djecu okrenut premanatrag na sjedalu s AKTIVNIMZRAČNIM JASTUKOM ispred njega,to bi moglo dovesti do SMRTI iliOZBILJNJIH OZLJEDA za DIJETE.SL: NIKOLI ne nameščajte otroškegavarnostnega sedeža, obrnjenega vnasprotni smeri vožnje, na sedež z


AKTIVNO ČELNO ZRAČNOBLAZINO, saj pri tem obstajanevarnost RESNIH ali SMRTNIHPOŠKODB za OTROKA.SR: NIKADA ne koristiti bezbednosnisistem za decu u kome su decaokrenuta unazad na sedištu saAKTIVNIM VAZDUŠNIMJASTUKOM ispred sedišta zato štoDETE može da NASTRADA ili da seTEŠKO POVREDI.MK: НИКОГАШ не користете детскоседиште свртено наназад наседиште заштитено со АКТИВНОВОЗДУШНО ПЕРНИЧЕ пред него,затоа што детето може ДА ЗАГИНЕили да биде ТЕШКО ПОВРЕДЕНО.BG: НИКОГА не използвайтедетска седалка, гледаща назад,върху седалка, която е защитеначрез АКТИВНА ВЪЗДУШНАВЪЗГЛАВНИЦА пред нея - може дасе стигне до СМЪРТ илиСЕРИОЗНО НАРАНЯВАНЕ наДЕТЕТО.RO: Nu utilizaţi NICIODATĂ un scaunpentru copil îndreptat spre partea dinspate a maşinii pe un scaun protejatde un AIRBAG ACTIV în faţa sa;

acest lucru poate duce la DECESULsau VĂTĂMAREA GRAVĂ aCOPILULUI.CS: NIKDY nepoužívejte dětskýzádržný systém instalovaný protisměru jízdy na sedadle, které jechráněno před sedadlem AKTIVNÍMAIRBAGEM. Mohlo by dojít kVÁŽNÉMU PORANĚNÍ nebo ÚMRTÍDÍTĚTE.SK: NIKDY nepoužívajte detskúsedačku otočenú vzad na sedadlechránenom AKTÍVNYM AIRBAGOM,pretože môže dôjsť k SMRTI aleboVÁŽNYM ZRANENIAM DIEŤAŤA.LT: JOKIU BŪDU nemontuokite atgalatgręžtos vaiko tvirtinimo sistemossėdynėje, prieš kurią įrengta AKTYVIORO PAGALVĖ, nes VAIKAS GALIŽŪTI arba RIMTAI SUSIŽALOTI.LV: NEKĀDĀ GADĪJUMĀneizmantojiet uz aizmuguri vērstubērnu sēdeklīti sēdvietā, kas tiekaizsargāta ar tās priekšā uzstādītuAKTĪVU DROŠĪBAS SPILVENU, jopretējā gadījumā BĒRNS var gūtSMAGAS TRAUMAS vai IET BOJĀ.

ET: ÄRGE kasutage tahapoolesuunatud lapseturvaistet istmel, milleees on AKTIIVSE TURVAPADJAGAkaitstud iste, sest see võibpõhjustada LAPSE SURMA võiTÕSISE VIGASTUSE.MT: QATT tuża trażżin għat-tfal lijħares lejn in-naħa ta’ wara fuq sitprotett b’AIRBAG ATTIV quddiemu;dan jista’ jikkawża l-MEWT jewĠRIEĦI SERJI lit-TFAL.GA: Ná húsáid srian sábháilteachtalinbh cúil RIAMH ar shuíochán abhfuil mála aeir ag feidhmiú os achomhair. Tá baol BÁIS nó GORTÚDONA don PHÁISTE ag baint leis.Beyond the warning required byECE R94.02, for safety reasons aforward-facing child restraint systemmust only be used subject to theinstructions and restrictions in thetable 3 67.The airbag label is located on bothsides of the front passenger sun visor.Airbag deactivation 3 63.


Front airbag systemThe front airbag system consists ofone airbag in the steering wheel andone in the instrument panel on thefront passenger side. These can beidentified by the word AIRBAG.The front airbag system is triggered inthe event of a front-end impact of acertain severity. The ignition must beswitched on.

The inflated airbags cushion theimpact, thereby reducing the risk ofinjury to the upper body and head ofthe front seat occupantsconsiderably.

9 Warning

Optimum protection is onlyprovided when the seat is in theproper position.Seat position 3 47.Keep the area in which the airbaginflates clear of obstructions.Fit the seat belt correctly andengage securely. Only then is theairbag able to protect.

Side airbag system

The side airbag system consists of anairbag in each front seat backrest.This can be identified by the wordAIRBAG.The side airbag system is triggered inthe event of a side impact of a certainseverity. The ignition must beswitched on.

The inflated airbags cushion theimpact, thereby reducing the risk ofinjury to the upper body and pelvis inthe event of a side-on collisionconsiderably.


9 Warning

Keep the area in which the airbaginflates clear of obstructions.

NoteOnly use protective seat covers thathave been approved for the vehicle.Be careful not to cover the airbags.

Curtain airbag systemThe curtain airbag system consists ofan airbag in the roof frame on eachside. This can be identified by theword AIRBAG on the roof pillars.The curtain airbag system is triggeredin the event of a side-on impact of acertain severity. The ignition must beswitched on.

The inflated airbags cushion theimpact, thereby reducing the risk ofinjury to the head in the event of aside-on impact considerably.

9 Warning

Keep the area in which the airbaginflates clear of obstructions.The hooks on the handles in theroof frame are only suitable forhanging up light articles ofclothing, without coat hangers. Donot keep any items in theseclothes.

Airbag deactivationThe front passenger airbag systemmust be deactivated for child restraintsystem on the passenger seataccording to the instructions in thetable 3 67. The side airbag andcurtain airbag systems, the beltpretensioners and all driver airbagsystems will remain active.

The front passenger airbag systemcan be deactivated via a key-operated switch on the passengerside of the instrument panel.


Use the ignition key to choose theposition:*OFF : front passenger airbag is

deactivated and will notinflate in the event of acollision. Control indicator*OFF illuminatescontinuously in theoverhead console.

VON : front passenger airbag isactive

9 Danger

Deactivate passenger airbag onlyin combination with the use of achild restraint system, subject tothe instructions and restrictions inthe table 3 67.Otherwise, there is a risk of fatalinjury for a person occupying aseat with a deactivated frontpassenger airbag.

If the control indicator V illuminatesfor approx. 60 seconds after theignition is switched on, the frontpassenger airbag system will inflatein the event of a collision.If both control indicators areilluminated at the same time, there isa system failure. The status of thesystem is not discernible, thereforeno person is allowed to occupy thefront passenger seat. Contact aworkshop immediately.Consult a workshop immediately ifneither of the two control indicatorsare illuminated.Change status only when the vehicleis stopped with the ignition off.

Status remains until the next change.Control indicator for airbagdeactivation 3 110.


Child restraintsChild restraint systems

9 Danger

If using a rear-facing child restraintsystem on the front passengerseat, the airbag system for thefront passenger seat must bedeactivated. This also applies tocertain forward-facing childrestraint systems as indicated inthe tables 3 67.

Airbag deactivation 3 63.Airbag label 3 58.We recommend a child restraintsystem which is tailored specifically tothe vehicle. For further information,contact your workshop.When a child restraint system is beingused, pay attention to the followingusage and installation instructions aswell as to those supplied with the childrestraint system.

Always comply with local or nationalregulations. In some countries, theuse of child restraint systems isforbidden on certain seats.Child restraint systems can befastened with:● Three-point seat belt● ISOFIX brackets● Top-tether anchor

Three-point seat beltChild restraint systems can befastened by using a three-point seatbelt. Depending on the size of theused child restraint systems, up tothree child restraint systems can beattached to the rear seats 3 67.

ISOFIX brackets

Fasten vehicle-approved ISOFIXchild restraint systems to the ISOFIXmounting brackets. Specific vehicleISOFIX child restraint systempositions are marked in the ISOFIXtable 3 67.ISOFIX mounting brackets areindicated by a label on the backrest.An i-size child restraint system is anuniversal ISOFIX child restraintsystem according UN Regulation No.129.All i-size child restraint systems canbe used on any vehicle seat suitablefor i-size, i-size table 3 67.


Either a Top-tether strap or a supportleg must be used in addition to theISOFIX mounting brackets.

i-size child seats and vehicle seatswith i-size approval are marked withi-size symbol, see illustration.

Top-tether anchorsTop-tether anchors are marked withthe symbol : for a child seat.

In addition to the ISOFIX mountingbrackets, fasten the Top-tether strapto the Top-tether anchors.ISOFIX child restraint systems ofuniversal category positions aremarked in the table by IUF 3 67.

Selecting the right systemThe rear seats are the mostconvenient location to fasten a childrestraint system.Children should travel facingrearwards in the vehicle as long aspossible. This makes sure that thechild's backbone, which is still veryweak, is under less strain in the eventof an accident.Suitable are restraint systems thatcomply with valid UN ECEregulations. Check local laws andregulations for mandatory use of childrestraint systems.The following child restraints arerecommended for the followingweight classes:

Maxi Cosi Cabriofix for children up to13 kg for group 0, group 0+ and DuoPlus for children from 13 kg to 18 kgin group I.Ensure that the child restraint systemto be installed is compatible with thevehicle type.Ensure that the mounting location ofthe child restraint system within thevehicle is correct, see followingtables.Allow children to enter and exit thevehicle only on the side facing awayfrom the traffic.When the child restraint system is notin use, secure the seat with a seat beltor remove it from the vehicle.NoteDo not affix anything on the childrestraint systems and do not coverthem with any other materials.A child restraint system which hasbeen subjected to stress in anaccident must be replaced.


Child restraint installation locationsPermissible options for fastening a child restraint system with a three-point seat belt

Weight classOn front passenger seat

On rear outboard seats On rear centre seatactivated airbag deactivated airbag

Group 0: up to 10 kg X U1,2 U/L3 U

Group 0+: up to 13 kg X U1,2 U/L3 U

Group I: 9 to 18 kg X U1,2 U/L3,4 U4

Group II: 15 to 25 kg U1,2 X U/L3,4 U4

Group III: 22 to 36 kg U1,2 X U/L3,4 U4

U : universal suitability in conjunction with three-point seat beltL : suitable for particular child restraint systems of the 'specific-vehicle', 'restricted' or 'semi-universal' categories. The

child restraint system must be approved for the specific vehicle type (refer to the vehicle type list of the child restraintsystem)

X : no child restraint system permitted in this weight class1 : move seat forwards as far as necessary and adjust seat backrest as far as necessary to a vertical position to ensure

that the belt runs forwards from the upper anchorage point2 : move seat upwards as far as necessary and adjust seat backrest as far as necessary to a vertical position to ensure

that the belt is tight on the buckle side3 : move the respective front seat ahead of the child restraint system forwards as far as necessary4 : adjust the respective headrest as necessary or remove if required


Permissible options for fitting an ISOFIX child restraint system with ISOFIX brackets

Weight class Size class FixtureOn front passenger seat On rear outboard

seatsOn rear centreseatactivated airbag deactivated airbag

Group 0: up to 10 kg G ISO/L2 X X X X

F ISO/L1 X X X X

E ISO/R1 X X IL3 X

Group 0+: up to 13 kg E ISO/R1 X X IL3 X

D ISO/R2 X X IL3 X

C ISO/R3 X X IL3 X

Group I: 9 to 18 kg D ISO/R2 X X IL3,4 X

C ISO/R3 X X IL3,4 X

B ISO/F2 X X IL, IUF3,4 X

B1 ISO/F2X X X IL, IUF3,4 X

A ISO/F3 X X IL, IUF3,4 X

Group II: 15 to 25 kg X X IL3,4 X

Group III: 22 to 36 kg X X IL3,4 X


IL : suitable for particular ISOFIX restraint systems of the 'specific-vehicle', 'restricted' or 'semi-universal' categories.The ISOFIX restraint system must be approved for the specific vehicle type (refer to the vehicle type list of the childrestraint system)

IUF : suitable for ISOFIX forward-facing child restraint systems of universal category approved for use in this weight classX : no ISOFIX child restraint system approved in this weight class1 : move seat forwards as far as necessary and adjust seat backrest inclination as far as necessary to a vertical position

to ensure that the belt runs forwards from the upper anchorage point2 : move seat height adjustment upwards as far as necessary and adjust seat backrest inclination as far as necessary

to a vertical position to ensure that the belt is tight on the buckle side3 : move the respective front seat ahead of the child restraint system forwards as far as necessary4 : adjust the respective headrest as necessary or remove if required

ISOFIX size class and seat deviceA – ISO/F3 : forward-facing child restraint system for children of maximum size in the weight class 9 to 18 kgB – ISO/F2 : forward-facing child restraint system for smaller children in the weight class 9 to 18 kgB1 – ISO/F2X : forward-facing child restraint system for smaller children in the weight class 9 to 18 kgC – ISO/R3 : rear-facing child restraint system for children of maximum size in the weight class up to 18 kgD – ISO/R2 : rear-facing child restraint system for smaller children in the weight class up to 18 kgE – ISO/R1 : rear-facing child restraint system for young children in the weight class up to 13 kgF– ISO/L1 : left lateral facing position child restraint system (carry-cot)G – ISO/L2 : right lateral facing position child restraint system (carry-cot)

Permissible options for fitting an i-Size child restraint system with ISOFIX brackets

On front passenger seatOn rear outboard seats On rear centre seatactivated airbag deactivated airbag

i-Size child restraint systems X X i - U X


i - U : suitable for i-Size 'universal' forward and rearward facing child restraint systemsX : seating position not suitable for i-Size 'universal' child restraint systems

Storage 71

Storage

Storage compartments ................ 71Glovebox ................................... 71Cupholders ................................ 71Front storage ............................. 72Armrest storage ......................... 72

Load compartment ....................... 73Rear storage .............................. 79Load compartment cover ........... 79Rear floor storage cover ............ 81Lashing eyes ............................. 81Cargo management system ...... 82Safety net .................................. 84Warning triangle ........................ 86First aid kit ................................. 87

Roof rack system ......................... 88Roof rack ................................... 88

Loading information ..................... 88

Storage compartments

9 Warning

Do not store heavy or sharpobjects in the storagecompartments. Otherwise, thestorage compartment lid couldopen and vehicle occupants couldbe injured by objects being thrownaround in the event of hardbraking, a sudden change indirection or an accident.

Glovebox

The glovebox features a pen holder,a coin holder and an adapter for thelocking wheel nuts.The glovebox may also contain a CDplayer and a tool for removing thefuse cover with power connector.The glovebox should be closed whilstdriving.

Cupholders

Cupholders are located in the centreconsole.

72 Storage

Depending on the version,cupholders are located under a coverin the centre console. Slide coverbackwards.

Front storage

A storage compartment is locatednext to the steering wheel.

Armrest storageStorage under the front armrest

Press button to fold up the armrest.The armrest must be in rearmostposition.

Storage 73

Load compartmentDepending on the equipment, therear seat backrest is divided into twoor three parts. All parts can be foldeddown.Before folding rear seat backrests,execute the following if necessary:● 5-door hatchback: remove the

load compartment cover 3 79.● Sports Tourer: remove roller

blind 3 79.● Press and hold the catch to push

the head restraints down 3 46.● Remove the rear head restraints

to have the backrests fully rest onthe seat cushions 3 46.

Load compartment extension(two-part rear seat backrest), 5-door Hatchback

● Guide the seat belts of the outerseats through side supports toprotect them against damage.When folding the backrests, pullthe seat belts along with them.

● Pull the release lever on one orboth outer sides and fold downthe backrests onto the seatcushion.

● Take the seat belt out of the seatbackrest guide and put it behindthe retainer as shown in theillustration.

● To fold up, raise the backrestsand guide them into an uprightposition until they engageaudibly.

74 Storage

The backrests are properlyengaged when the red mark nearthe release lever is no longervisible.

9 Warning

When folding up, ensure thatbackrests are securely locked inposition before driving. Failure todo so may result in personal injuryor damage to the load or vehicle inthe event of hard braking or acollision.

The seat belt of the centre seat couldbe blocked when the backrest isfolded up too quickly. To unlock theretractor, push in the seat belt or pullit out by approx. 20 mm then release.

Load compartment extension(three-part rear seat backrest), 5-door Hatchback● Fold up the rear armrest.

● Pull the loop and fold down thebackrest of the centre seat.


9 Warning

Take care when folding down theright outer seat backrest if thecentre seat backrest is alreadyfolded down. Risk of injury due tobolt protruding from the inner sideof the backrest.

Storage 75

● Guide the seat belts of the outerseats through side supports toprotect them against damage.When folding the backrests, pullthe seat belts along with them.

● Take the seat belt out of the seatbackrest guide and put it behindthe retainer as shown in theillustration.


The backrests are properlyengaged when the red marks onboth sides near the release leverare no longer visible.

9 Warning



76 Storage

Load compartment extension(two-part rear seat backrest),Sports Tourer

● Insert latch plates of the outerseat belts into side holder toprotect the belts against damage,see illustration.




9 Warning


Storage 77


Load compartment extension(three-part rear seat backrest),Sports Tourer● Fold up the rear centre armrest.

● Pull the loop and fold down thebackrest of the centre seat.

● Insert latch plates of the outerseat belts into side holder toprotect the belts against damage,see illustration.


9 Warning

Take care when folding down theright outer seat backrest if thecentre seat backrest is alreadyfolded down. Risk of injury due tobolt protruding from the inner sideof the backrest.

78 Storage

● Alternatively fold seat backrestsfrom the load compartment: pullswitch on left or right sidewall ofthe load compartment to fold thecorresponding part of the rearseat backrest.

9 Warning

Take care when operating the rearbackrests from the loadcompartment. The backrest isfolded with considerable power.Risk of injury, particularly tochildren.

Ensure that nothing is attached tothe rear seats or located on theseat cushion.



9 Warning



Storage 79

Rear storageStorage box

A storage box is located in the loadcompartment. Remove the cover togain access to the storage box. Rearfloor storage cover 3 81.

Load compartment coverDo not place any objects on the cover.

5-door hatchback

Removing

Unhook retaining strings fromtailgate.

Lift cover at the rear and push itupwards at the front.Remove the cover.

FittingEngage cover in side guides and folddownwards. Attach retaining stringsto tailgate.

Sports Tourer

Closing roller blindPull the roller blind using the handletowards the rear and upwards until itengages in the sideward retainers.

80 Storage

Opening roller blind

Pull the handle at the end of the rollerblind to the rear and downwards. Itrolls up automatically.

Removing roller blind

Open the roller blind.Pull the release lever on the right sideup and hold it. Lift the roller blind firston the right side and remove fromretainers.

All engine versions, except CNG: Theremoved roller blind can be storedunder the rear floor cover as shown inthe illustration. Insert the left side ofthe rolled up cover first in the frontright recess, pull the release lever upand insert the right side in the front leftrecess.Rear floor storage cover 3 81.

Installing roller blindInsert the left side of the roller blind inthe recess, then pull the release leverup and hold and insert the right sideof the roller blind in the recess andengage.

Storage 81

Rear floor storage cover

Caution

Vehicle versions with CNG: Do notstow any objects in thecompartment beneath the rearfloor cover.

Rear floor cover

5-door Hatchback

The rear floor cover can be removed.Raise cover at the rear and slightlyrotate at one side before removing.

Sports Tourer

Pull the handle and fold the rear partof the cover forward.

Set up the folded cover upright behindthe rear seat backrests.

Lashing eyesThe lashing eyes are designed tosecure items against slippage, e.g.using lashing straps or luggage net.

5-door HatchbackFirst remove the rear floor storagecover to get access to the lashingeyes.

On vehicles equipped with a sparewheel, the front lashing eyes arelocated at the sidewalls.

82 Storage

On vehicles equipped with tyre repairkit, the front lashing eyes are locatedunderneath the rear floor coverbehind the rear seats. To get accessto the lashing eyes, open theperforated parts of the cover by usingthe screwdriver. Vehicle tools 3 252.Stick the screwdriver through thecover as shown in the illustration andfold up the perforated part of thecover.Fold up the lashing eyes by using thescrewdriver.

Sports Tourer

Front and rear lashing eyes arelocated at the sidewalls. Fold up thelashing eyes to use and fold downwhen not required.

Cargo management systemThe FlexOrganizer is a flexiblesystem for dividing up the loadcompartment.The system consists of:● adapters● mesh pockets● hooks

● service box● strap set

The components are fitted in rails onboth side panels using adapters andhooks.

Installation of adapters in the rails

Fold open the handle plate, insert theadapter into the upper and lowergroove of the rail and move to therequired position. Turn the handleplate upwards to lock the adapter. Toremove, turn the handle plate downand move out of the rail.

Storage 83

Variable partition net

Insert adapters into the requiredposition in the rails. Stick together thehalves of the net rods.To install, push rods together a littleand insert into the relevant openingsin the adapters.To remove, press the net rodstogether and remove from theadapters.

Net pocket

Insert adapters into the requiredposition in the rails. The net pocketcan be suspended from the adapters.

Installation of hooks in the rails

Insert the hook in the desired positionfirst in the upper groove of the rail andthen press in the lower groove. Toremove, first pull out of the uppergroove.

84 Storage

Service box

Install two hooks in the upper rail.Insert the upper brackets of the boxfrom above into the hooks.

Alternatively install both hooks in thelower rail. Plug in the lower bracketsof the box from above into the lowerhooks.

Strap set

Insert the adapters of the strap set ina rail. Make sure that the belt is nottwisted.The strap set has two locks to open.The belt can be tightened.

Safety netThe safety net is available on theSports tourer and can be installedbehind the rear seats or, if the rearseat backrests are folded, behind thefront seats.Passengers must not be transportedbehind the safety net.

Installation

Behind the rear seats

● There are installation openingson both sides in the roof frameabove the rear seats: suspend

Storage 85

and engage rod of net at oneside, compress rod and suspendand engage at the other side.

● Attach the hooks of safety netstraps in loops underneath therear floor cover behind the rearseats. To get access to the loops,open the perforated parts in thefloor cover on both sides by usingthe screwdriver and fold up theloops. Attach the hooks to theloops.

● Tension both straps by pulling atthe loose end.

● Rear seat backrests must beraised up.

Behind the front seats

● There are installation openingson both sides in the roof frameabove the front seats: suspendand engage rod of net at oneside, compress rod and suspendand engage at the other side.

● Attach hooks of safety net strapsto loops in the floor in front of therear seats. To get access to theloops, push in the perforatedparts in the floor cover on bothsides. Attach the hooks to theloops.

● Tension both straps by pulling atthe loose end.

● Push down head restraints andfold down rear seat backrests3 73.

86 Storage

Removal

Pull the flap at the tightener on bothsides to release the straps. Detachhooks from the eyes.Unhook the safety net rods from thebrackets in the roof frame.Roll up the net and secure with astrap.

StowingAll engine versions, except CNG: Theremoved safety net can be storedunder the rear floor cover 3 81.

Warning triangle5-door hatchback

Stow the warning triangle in therecess in front of the tailgate.

5-door hatchback with CNG

Stow the warning triangle in therecess beneath the rear floor cover.

Storage 87

Sports Tourer

Stow the warning triangle in therecess under the rear floor cover onthe right or left side.

First aid kitStow the first aid kit in thecompartment in the left side wall.

Illustration shows 5-door Hatchback.To open the compartment, disengagecover and open.

Illustration shows Sports Tourer.

To open the cover turn knob.

88 Storage

Roof rack systemRoof rackFor safety reasons and to avoiddamage to the roof, the vehicleapproved roof rack system isrecommended. For furtherinformation contact your workshop.

Mounting roof rack

5-door Hatchback, Sports Tourer

Open all doors.Mounting points are located in eachdoor frame of the vehicle body.

Fasten the roof rack according to theinstallation instructions delivered withthe roof rack.Remove the roof rack when not inuse.

9 Warning

Sports TourerRoof railings are a styling elementonly and not designed to carry anyload. Installation of roof racks orother accessory is not permitted.Use the designated mountingpoints in the door framesexclusively.

Loading information

● Heavy objects in the loadcompartment should be placedagainst the seat backrests. Makesure that the backrests aresecurely engaged, i.e. no longershowing the red markings on theside near the release lever. Ifobjects can be stacked, heavierobjects should be placed at thebottom.

● Secure objects with lashingstraps attached to lashing eyes3 81.

Storage 89

● Secure loose objects in the loadcompartment to prevent themfrom sliding.

● When transporting objects in theload compartment, the backrestsof the rear seats must not beangled forward.

● Do not allow the load to protrudeabove the upper edge of thebackrests.

● Sports Tourer: install safety netwhen transporting objects in theload compartment.

● Do not place any objects on theload compartment cover or theinstrument panel, and do notcover the sensor on top of theinstrument panel.

● The load must not obstruct theoperation of the pedals, parkingbrake and gear selector lever, orhinder the freedom of movementof the driver. Do not place anyunsecured objects in the interior.

● Do not drive with an open loadcompartment.

9 Warning

Always make sure that the load inthe vehicle is securely stowed.Otherwise objects can be thrownaround inside the vehicle andcause personal injury or damageto the load or car.

● The payload is the differencebetween the permitted grossvehicle weight (see identificationplate 3 280) and the EC kerbweight.To calculate the payload, enterthe data for your vehicle in theweights table at the front of thismanual.The EC kerb weight includesweights for the driver (68 kg),luggage (7 kg) and all fluids (fueltank 90% full).Optional equipment andaccessories increase the kerbweight.

● Driving with a roof load increasesthe sensitivity of the vehicle tocross-winds and has a

detrimental effect on vehiclehandling due to the vehicle'shigher centre of gravity.Distribute the load evenly andsecure it properly with retainingstraps. Adjust the tyre pressureand vehicle speed according tothe load conditions. Check andretighten the straps frequently.Do not drive faster than120 km/h.The permissible roof load is75 kg. The roof load is thecombined weight of the roof rackand the load.

90 Instruments and controls

Instruments andcontrols

Controls ....................................... 91Steering wheel adjustment ........ 91Steering wheel controls ............. 91Heated steering wheel ............... 92Horn ........................................... 92Windscreen wiper/washer ......... 92Rear window wiper/washer ....... 94Outside temperature .................. 95Clock ......................................... 95Power outlets ............................. 97Power connector ....................... 98Ashtrays .................................... 99

Warning lights, gauges and indi‐cators ......................................... 101

Instrument cluster .................... 101Speedometer ........................... 104Odometer ................................ 105Trip odometer .......................... 105Tachometer ............................. 106Fuel gauge .............................. 106Fuel selector ............................ 106Engine coolant temperaturegauge ..................................... 107

Service display ........................ 108

Control indicators .................... 109Turn signal ............................... 109Seat belt reminder ................... 109Airbag and belt tensioners ....... 110Airbag deactivation .................. 110Charging system ..................... 111Malfunction indicator light ........ 111Brake and clutch system ......... 111Electric parking brake .............. 111Electric parking brake fault ...... 111Antilock brake system (ABS) ... 112Gear shifting ............................ 112Following distance ................... 112Lane keep assist ..................... 112Electronic Stability Control off . 112Electronic Stability Control andTraction Control system ......... 112

Traction Control system off ..... 113Preheating ............................... 113Tyre pressure monitoringsystem .................................... 113

Engine oil pressure .................. 113Low fuel ................................... 113Immobiliser .............................. 114Exterior light ............................ 114High beam ............................... 114High beam assist ..................... 114LED headlights ........................ 114Fog light ................................... 114Rear fog light ........................... 114

Cruise control .......................... 114Adaptive cruise control ............ 114Vehicle detected ahead ........... 115Speed limiter ........................... 115Traffic sign assistant ................ 115Door open ................................ 115

Information displays ................... 115Driver Information Centre ........ 115Info display .............................. 121

Vehicle messages ...................... 123Warning chimes ....................... 124Battery voltage ........................ 124

Vehicle personalisation .............. 125Telematics service ..................... 131

OnStar ..................................... 131

Instruments and controls 91

ControlsSteering wheel adjustment

Unlock lever, adjust steering wheel,then engage lever and ensure it isfully locked.Do not adjust steering wheel unlessvehicle is stationary and steeringwheel lock has been released.

Steering wheel controlsDriver Information Centre, somedriver assistance systems,Infotainment system and a connectedmobile phone can be operated via thecontrols on the steering wheel.

The illustrations show differentversions.

Driver Information Centre 3 115.Driver assistance systems 3 182.Further information is available in theInfotainment manual.


Heated steering wheel

Activate heating by pressing *.Activation is indicated by the LED inthe button.

The recommended grip areas of thesteering wheel are heated quickerand to a higher temperature than theother areas.Heating is operational when theengine is running and during anAutostop.Stop-start system 3 163.

Horn

Press j.

Windscreen wiper/washerWindscreen wiper with adjustablewiper interval

HI : fastLO : slowINT : interval wipingOFF : off

For a single wipe when thewindscreen wiper is off, press thelever downwards to position 1x.Do not use if the windscreen is frozen.Switch off in car washes.


Adjustable wiper interval

Wiper lever in position INT.Turn the adjuster wheel to adjust thewiping frequency.

Windscreen wiper with rainsensor

HI : fastLO : slowAUTO : automatic wiping with rain

sensorOFF : off

In AUTO position, the rain sensordetects the amount of water on thewindscreen and automaticallyregulates the frequency of thewindscreen wiper.For a single wipe when thewindscreen wiper is off, press thelever downwards to position 1x.Do not use if the windscreen is frozen.

Switch off in car washes.

Adjustable sensitivity of the rainsensor

Wiper lever in position AUTO.Turn the adjuster wheel to adjust thesensitivity of the rain sensor.


Keep the sensor free from dust, dirtand ice.Rain sensor function can be activatedor deactivated in the Vehiclepersonalisation.Select the relevant setting in Settings,I Vehicle in the Info-Display.Info-Display 3 121.Vehicle personalisation 3 125.

Windscreen washer

Pull lever. Washer fluid is sprayedonto the windscreen and the wiperwipes a few times.Washer fluid 3 232.

Rear window wiper/washerRear window wiper

Turn outer cap to activate the rearwindow wiper:OFF : offINT : intermittent operationON : continuous operation

Do not use if the rear window isfrozen.Switch off in car washes.The rear window wiper comes onautomatically when the windscreenwiper is switched on and reverse gearis engaged.


Activation or deactivation of thisfunction can be changed in the menuSettings in the Info-Display.Vehicle personalisation 3 125.

Rear window washer

Push lever.Washer fluid is sprayed onto the rearwindow and the wiper wipes a fewtimes.The rear window washer system isdeactivated when the fluid level islow.Washer fluid 3 232.

Outside temperatureA drop in temperature is indicatedimmediately and a rise in temperatureafter a time delay.

Illustration shows an example.

If outside temperature drops to 3 °C,a warning message is displayed in theDriver Information Centre.

9 Warning

The road surface may already beicy even though the displayindicates a few degrees above0 °C.

ClockDate and time are shown in theInfo-Display.Info-Display 3 121.


Graphic-Info-DisplayPress MENU to open the respectiveaudio menu.

Select Time and Date.

Set TimeSelect Set Time to enter therespective submenu.Select Auto Set at the bottom of thescreen. Activate either On - RDS orOff (Manual).If Off (Manual) is selected, adjusthours and minutes.Repeatedly select 12-24 HR at thebottom of the screen to choose a timemode.If the 12-hour mode is selected, athird column for AM and PM selectionis displayed. Select the desiredoption.

Set DateSelect Set Date to enter therespective submenu.Select Auto Set at the bottom of thescreen. Activate either On - RDS orOff (Manual).If Off (Manual) is selected, adjust thedate settings.

7'' Colour-Info-DisplayPress ; and then select Settings.Select Time and Date to display therespective submenu.

Set Time FormatTo select the desired time format,touch the screen buttons 12 h or 24 h.

Set Date FormatTo select the desired date format,select Set Date Format and choosebetween the available options in thesubmenu.

Auto SetTo choose whether time and date areto be set automatically or manually,select Auto Set.For time and date to be setautomatically, select On - RDS.For time and date to be set manually,select Off - Manual. If Auto Set is setto Off - Manual, the submenu itemsSet Time and Set Date becomeavailable.

Set time and dateTo adjust the time and date settings,select Set Time or Set Date.Touch + and - to adjust the settings.


8'' Colour-Info-DisplayPress ; and then select theSettings icon.Select Time and Date.

Set timeSelect Set Time to enter therespective submenu.

Select Auto Set at the bottom of thescreen. Activate either On - RDS orOff - Manual.If Off - Manual is selected, adjusthours and minutes by touching n oro.

Touch 12-24 Hr on the right side of thescreen to select a time mode.If 12-hour mode is selected, a thirdcolumn for AM and PM setting isdisplayed. Select the desired option.

Set dateSelect Set Date to enter therespective submenu.NoteIf date information is automaticallyprovided, this menu item is notavailable.

Select Auto Set at the bottom of thescreen. Activate either On - RDS orOff - Manual.If Off - Manual is selected, adjust thedate by touching n or o.

Clock displaySelect Clock Display to enter therespective submenu.To turn off the digital clock display inthe menus, select Off.

Power outlets

A 12 Volt power outlet is located in thecentre console.


Sports Tourer: A 12 Volt power outletis located at the left sidewall in theload compartment.Do not exceed the maximum powerconsumption of 120 watts.With ignition off, the power outlet isdeactivated. Additionally, the poweroutlet is deactivated in the event oflow vehicle battery voltage.Electrical accessories that areconnected must comply with theelectromagnetic compatibilityrequirements laid down inDIN VDE 40 839.Do not connect any current-deliveringaccessories, e.g. electrical chargingdevices or batteries.Do not damage the outlets by usingunsuitable plugs.Stop-start system 3 163.

USB charging port

Two USB ports for charging devicesonly are located in the back of thecentre console.Each socket provides 2.1 Ampere atfive Volts.NoteThe sockets must always be keptclean and dry.

Power connector

The power connector (PowerFlexBar) is attached on the instrumentpanel fuse box cover. A fragrancediffuser (AirWellness) or a phoneholder can be attached to the powerconnector.Further information regarding phoneholder is available in the Infotainmentmanual.


Fragrance diffuser

1. Attach fragrance diffuser to upperside of the power connector (1)and swivel downwards to engage(2).

2. Press front button to activate anddeactivate the fragrance diffuser.LED indicates activation.

3. To remove fragrance diffuser,press diffuser downwards andswivel backwards.

4. To replace fragrance pad, shiftcartridge upwards and remove it.

5. Replace fragrance pad.

Ashtrays

Caution

To be used only for ash and not forcombustible rubbish.


A portable ashtray can be placed inthe cupholders.


Warning lights, gaugesand indicatorsInstrument clusterDepending on the version, twoinstrument clusters are available:


Midlevel instrument cluster


Uplevel instrument cluster


Overview

O Turn signal 3 109

X Seat belt reminder 3 109

v Airbag and belt tensioners3 110

V Airbag deactivation 3 110

p Charging system 3 111

Z Malfunction indicator light3 111

R Brake and clutch system 3 111

m Electric parking brake 3 111

j Electric parking brake fault3 111

u Antilock brake system (ABS)3 112

R Gear shifting 3 112

E Following distance 3 112

a Lane keep assist 3 112

a Electronic Stability Control off3 112

b Electronic Stability Control andTraction Control system 3 112

k Traction Control system off3 113

! Preheating 3 113

w Tyre pressure monitoringsystem 3 113

I Engine oil pressure 3 113

Y Low fuel 3 113

d Immobiliser 3 114

8 Exterior light 3 114

C High beam 3 114

f High beam assist 3 114

f LED headlights 3 114

> Fog light 3 114

ø Rear fog light 3 114

m Cruise control 3 114 / Adaptivecruise control 3 114

C Adaptive cruise control 3 114

A Vehicle detected ahead 3 115

L Speed limiter 3 115

L Traffic sign assistant 3 115

h Door open 3 115

Speedometer

Indicates vehicle speed.


Odometer

The total recorded distance isdisplayed in km.

Trip odometerThe recorded distance since the lastreset is displayed on the trip computerpage.Trip odometer counts up to9,999 km and then restarts at 0.Two trip odometer pages areselectable for different trips.

Midlevel instrument cluster

Select ; by pressing Menu on theturn signal lever. Turn adjuster wheelon turn signal lever and select ;1or ;2. Each trip odometer page canbe reset separately by pressingSET/CLR on the turn signal lever fora few seconds on the respectivemenu.

Uplevel instrument cluster

Select Info page J on main menu.Choose page Trip A or Trip B bypressing o on the steering wheel.Each trip odometer can be resetseparately when ignition is on: selectrespective page, press >. Confirm bypressing 9.Driver Information Centre 3 115.


Tachometer

Displays the engine speed.Drive in a low engine speed range foreach gear as much as possible.

Caution

If the needle is in the red warningzone, the maximum permittedengine speed is exceeded. Engineat risk.

Fuel gauge

Displays the fuel level or gas content(CNG) in the tank depending on thecurrent operation mode.The arrow indicates the vehicle sidewhere the fuel filler flap is located.For bi-fuel engines, the DriverInformation Centre displays the fuellevel for the fuel type which iscurrently not in operation. The fuellevel for the fuel type which iscurrently in operation is shown in thefuel gauge.Control indicator Y illuminates if thelevel in the tank is low. Refuelimmediately if it flashes.

Never run the fuel tank dry.Because of the fuel remaining in thetank, the top-up quantity may be lessthan the specified fuel tank capacity.

Fuel selectorNatural gas operation (CNG)

Press X to switch between petrol andnatural gas operation.The LED status shows the currentoperating mode.


LED off : petrol operationLED illu‐minates

: natural gas operation

LEDflashes forapprox.fiveseconds

: fuel mode transition isselected but switchingis not possible

LEDflashes

: fuel mode transition inprocess, flashing stopsif transition is completed

Switching is not possible at high loads(e.g. powerful acceleration, driving atfull throttle).If the selector switch is operatedseveral times within a short time, aswitchover inhibitor is activated. Theengine remains in the currentoperating mode. The inhibitorremains active until the ignition isswitched off.A slight loss of power and torque canbe expected during petrol operation.You must therefore adapt your drivingstyle, e.g. during overtakingmanoeuvres and high vehicle loads(e.g. towing loads) accordingly.

The vehicle consumes petrol whenstarting the engine and even when incertain natural gas operating modes.The petrol consumption in natural gasoperating mode can vary dependingon driving behaviour (e.g. high load ortowing). In case of a low fuel level, acorresponding message is displayedas a reminder to refuel.NoteAlways ensure that there is enoughpetrol in the tank.

Fuel for natural gas operation 3 219.

Forced fuel mode transitionNatural gas tank is running lowAs soon as the natural gas tank isempty, petrol operation isautomatically engaged. Manuallyengaging natural gas operation modeis not possible until natural gasrefuelling is detected.Before the petrol fuel system runsempty, a warning message will bedisplayed and cannot be dismissed.

Petrol tank is running low whilenatural gas is availableIf the remaining petrol level in the tankfalls below a certain level, natural gasoperation is automatically engagedprovided there is a sufficient naturalgas level in the tank. Manuallyengaging petrol operation mode is notpossible.Before both fuel systems run empty,a warning message will be displayedand cannot be dismissed.

Engine coolant temperaturegauge

Displays the coolant temperature.


50 : engine operatingtemperature not yetreached

centralarea

: normal operatingtemperature

130 : temperature too high

Caution

If engine coolant temperature istoo high, stop vehicle, switch offengine. Danger to engine. Checkcoolant level.

Service displayThe engine oil life system informswhen to change the engine oil andfilter. Based on driving conditions, theinterval at which an engine oil andfilter change will be indicated can varyconsiderably.

The remaining oil life duration menuis displayed in the Driver InformationCentre 3 115.

On Midlevel display select theSettings Menu by pressing MENU onthe turn signal lever. Turn the adjusterwheel to select the Remaining OilLife page.

On Uplevel display select Info Menuby pressing p on steering wheel.Press P to select Remaining OilLife page.Remaining oil life duration is indicatedin percentage.


ResetOn Midlevel display press SET/CLRon turn signal lever for severalseconds to reset. The ignition must beswitched on but engine not running.On Uplevel display press > onsteering wheel to open the subfolder.Select Reset and confirm by pressing9 for several seconds. The ignitionmust be switched on but engine notrunning.The system must be reset every timethe engine oil is changed to allowproper functionality. Seek theassistance of a workshop.

Next serviceWhen the system has calculated thatengine oil life has been diminished,Change Engine Oil Soon appears inthe Driver Information Centre. Haveengine oil and filter changed by aworkshop within one week or500 km (whichever occurs first).Service information 3 276.

Control indicatorsThe control indicators described arenot present in all vehicles. Thedescription applies to all instrumentversions. Depending on theequipment, the position of the controlindicators may vary. When theignition is switched on, most controlindicators will illuminate briefly as afunctionality test.The control indicator colours mean:red : danger, important reminderyellow : warning, information, faultgreen : confirmation of activationblue : confirmation of activationwhite : confirmation of activation

See all control indicators on differentinstrument clusters 3 101.

Turn signalO illuminates or flashes green.

Illuminates brieflyThe parking lights are switched on.

FlashesA turn signal or the hazard warningflashers are activated.Rapid flashing: failure of a turn signallight or associated fuse, failure of turnsignal light on trailer.Bulb replacement 3 235, Fuses3 245.Turn signals 3 142.

Seat belt reminderSeat belt reminder on front seatsX for driver's seat illuminates orflashes red in the instrument cluster.

k for front passenger seat illuminatesor flashes red in the roof console,when seat is occupied.


IlluminatesAfter the ignition has been switchedon until the seat belt has beenfastened.

FlashesAfter having started the engine for amaximum of 100 seconds until theseat belt has been fastened.

Seat belt status on rear seats(vehicles with Midlevel display)X illuminates or flashes white or greyin the Driver Information Centre, afterhaving started the engine.

Illuminates whiteSeat belt is unfastened.

Illuminates greySeat belt has been fastened.

Flashes white or greyFastened seat belt has beenunfastened.Fastening the seat belt 3 57.

Seat belt status on rear seats(vehicles with Uplevel display)X illuminates green or grey or flashesyellow in the Driver InformationCentre, after having started theengine.

Illuminates greySeat belt is unfastened.

Illuminates greenSeat belt has been fastened.

Flashes yellowFastened seat belt has beenunfastened.Fastening the seat belt 3 57.

Airbag and belt tensionersv illuminates red.When the ignition is switched on, thecontrol indicator illuminates forapprox. four seconds. If it does notilluminate, does not go out afterfour seconds or illuminates whilstdriving, there is a fault in the airbagsystem. Seek the assistance of a

workshop. The airbags and beltpretensioners may fail to trigger in theevent of an accident.Deployment of the belt pretensionersor airbags is indicated by continuousillumination of v.

9 Warning

Have the cause of the faultremedied immediately by aworkshop.

Belt pretensioners, airbag system3 56, 3 58.

Airbag deactivation

V illuminates yellow.The front passenger airbag isactivated.* illuminates yellow.


The front passenger airbag isdeactivated.Airbag deactivation 3 63.

Charging systemp illuminates red.Illuminates when the ignition isswitched on and extinguishes shortlyafter the engine starts.

Illuminates when the engine isrunningStop, switch off engine. Vehiclebattery is not charging. Enginecooling may be interrupted. Thebrake servo unit may cease to beeffective. Seek the assistance of aworkshop.

Malfunction indicator lightZ illuminates or flashes yellow.Illuminates when the ignition isswitched on and extinguishes shortlyafter the engine starts.

Illuminates when the engine isrunningFault in the emission control system.The permitted emission limits may beexceeded.On diesel engines the cleaningprocess of the diesel particle filter ispotentially not possible.Seek the assistance of a workshopimmediately.

Flashes when the engine isrunningFault that could lead to catalyticconverter damage. Ease up on theaccelerator until the flashing stops.Seek the assistance of a workshopimmediately.

Brake and clutch systemR illuminates red.The brake and clutch fluid level is toolow, when manual parking brake isnot applied 3 232.

9 Warning

Stop. Do not continue yourjourney. Consult a workshop.

Illuminates when the manual parkingbrake is applied and ignition isswitched on 3 177.

Electric parking brakem illuminates or flashes red.

IlluminatesElectric parking brake is applied3 177.

FlashesElectric parking brake is not fullyapplied or released. Depress thebrake pedal and attempt to reset thesystem by first releasing thenapplying the electric parking brake. Ifm remains flashing, do not drive andseek the assistance of a workshop.

Electric parking brake faultj illuminates or flashes yellow.


IlluminatesElectric parking brake is operatingwith degraded performance 3 177.

FlashesElectric parking brake is in servicemode. Stop vehicle, apply andrelease the electric parking brake toreset.

9 Warning

Have the cause of the faultremedied immediately by aworkshop.

Antilock brake system(ABS)u illuminates yellow.Illuminates for a few seconds after theignition is switched on. The system isready for operation when the controlindicator extinguishes.If the control indicator does not go outafter a few seconds, or if it illuminateswhile driving, there is a fault in the

ABS. The brake system remainsoperational but without ABSregulation.Antilock brake system 3 176.

Gear shiftingR or S with the number of a higher orlower gear is indicated, when up- ordownshifting is recommended for fuelsaving reasons.

Following distanceE indicates the following distancesetting of the alert timing sensitivityfor the forward collision alert usingfilled distance bars.Forward collision alert 3 193.

Lane keep assista illuminates green or yellow, orflashes yellow.

Illuminates greenThe system is switched on and readyto operate.

Illuminates yellowThe system approaches a detectedlane marking without using the turnsignal in that direction.

Flashes yellowThe system recognizes that the laneis departed significantly.Lane keep assist 3 215

Electronic Stability Controloffn illuminates yellow.The system is deactivated.

Electronic Stability Controland Traction Control systemb illuminates or flashes yellow.

IlluminatesA fault in the system is present.Continued driving is possible. Drivingstability, however, may deterioratedepending on road surfaceconditions.


Have the cause of the fault remediedby a workshop.

FlashesThe system is actively engaged.Engine output may be reduced andthe vehicle may be brakedautomatically to a small degree.Electronic Stability Control 3 180,Traction Control system 3 179.

Traction Control system offk illuminates yellow.The system is deactivated.

Preheating! illuminates yellow.Preheating of Diesel engine isactivated. Only activates whenoutside temperature is low. Start theengine when control indicatorextinguishes.

Tyre pressure monitoringsystemw illuminates or flashes yellow.

IlluminatesTyre pressure loss. Stop immediatelyand check tyre pressure.

FlashesFault in system or tyre withoutpressure sensor mounted (e.g. sparewheel). After 60 to 90 seconds thecontrol indicator illuminatescontinuously. Consult a workshop.

Engine oil pressureI illuminates red.Illuminates when the ignition isswitched on and extinguishes shortlyafter the engine starts.

Illuminates when the engine isrunning

Caution

Engine lubrication may beinterrupted. This may result indamage to the engine and/orlocking of the drive wheels.

1. Depress clutch.2. Select neutral gear.3. Move out of the flow of traffic as

quickly as possible withoutimpeding other vehicles.

4. Switch off ignition.

9 Warning

When the engine is off,considerably more force is neededto brake and steer.During an Autostop, the brakeservo unit will still be operational.Do not remove key until vehicle isstationary, otherwise the steeringwheel lock could engageunexpectedly.

Check oil level before seekingassistance of a workshop 3 230.

Low fuelY illuminates or flashes yellow.

IlluminatesLevel in fuel tank is too low.


FlashesFuel used up. Refuel immediately.Never run the tank dry.Refuelling 3 219.Catalytic converter 3 169.Bleeding the diesel fuel system3 234.

Immobiliserd flashes yellow.Fault in the immobiliser system. Theengine cannot be started.

Exterior light8 illuminates green.The exterior lights are on 3 136.

High beamC illuminates blue.Illuminated when high beam is on orduring headlight flash 3 137.

High beam assistf illuminates green.

The high beam assist is activated,see LED headlights 3 138.

LED headlightsf illuminates or flashes yellow.

IlluminatesFault in the system.Seek the assistance of a workshop.

FlashesSystem is switched to symmetricallow beam.Control indicator f flashes for approx.four seconds after the ignition isswitched on as a reminder forsymmetrical headlight 3 138.

Fog light> illuminates green.The front fog lights are on 3 142.

Rear fog lightø illuminates yellow.The rear fog light is on 3 143.

Cruise controlm illuminates white or green.

Illuminates whiteThe system is on.

Illuminates greenCruise control is active. Set speed isindicated in the Driver InformationCentre.Cruise control 3 182.

Adaptive cruise controlm illuminates white or green.C illuminates in the DriverInformation Centre.

m illuminates whiteThe system is on.

m illuminates greenAdaptive cruise control is active.When Adaptive cruise control is on oractive, C with the set speed isindicated in the Driver InformationCentre.


Adaptive cruise control 3 186.

Vehicle detected aheadA illuminates green or yellow.

Illuminates greenA vehicle ahead is detected in thesame lane.

Illuminates yellowThe distance to a preceding movingvehicle gets too small or whenapproaching another vehicle toorapidly.Adaptive cruise control 3 186,Forward collision alert 3 193.

Speed limiterL illuminates white or green.

Illuminates whiteThe system is on.

Illuminates greenSpeed limiter is active. Set speed isindicated near L symbol.

Speed limiter 3 184.

Traffic sign assistantL displays detected traffic signs ascontrol indicator.Traffic sign assistant 3 211.

Door openh illuminates red.A door or the tailgate is open.

Information displaysDriver Information CentreThe Driver Information Centre islocated in the instrument cluster.Depending on the version and theinstrument cluster, the DriverInformation Centre is available asMidlevel display or Uplevel display.Driver Information Centre indicatesdepending on the equipment:● overall and trip odometer● vehicle information● trip/fuel information● driving economy information● vehicle and warning messages● audio and infotainment

information● phone information● navigation information● vehicle settings


Midlevel display

Main menus are:● Trip/fuel information, displayed

by ;, see description below.● Vehicle information, displayed

by ?, see description below.● Eco information, displayed by

@, see description below.Some of the displayed functions differwhen the vehicle is being driven or ata standstill and some functions areonly active when the vehicle is beingdriven.

Selecting menus and functionsThe menus and functions can beselected via the buttons on the turnsignal lever.

Press MENU to switch between themain menus or to return from asubmenu to the next higher menulevel.Turn the adjuster wheel to select asubmenu of the main menu or to seta numeric value.Press SET/CLR to select and confirma function.

Vehicle and service messages arepopped up in the Driver InformationCentre if required. Confirm messagesby pressing SET/CLR. Vehiclemessages 3 123.

Uplevel display

Main menus are:● Trip/fuel information, displayed

by Info, see description below.● Audio information, displayed by

Audio, see description below.● Phone information, displayed by

Phone, see description below.


● Navigation information,displayed by Navigation, seedescription below.

● Vehicle information, displayed byOptions, see description below.

Some of the displayed functions differwhen the vehicle is being driven or ata standstill and some functions areonly active when the vehicle is beingdriven.

Selecting menus and functionsThe menus and functions can beselected via the buttons on the rightside in the steering wheel.

● Press p to open main menu page.● Select a main menu page with

Q or P.● Confirm a main menu page with

9.Once a main menu page is selected,press Q or P to select subpages.● Press q to open a next folder of

the selected subpage.● Press Q or P to select functions

or to set a numeric value, ifrequired.

● Press 9 to select and confirm afunction.

Vehicle and service messages pop-up in the Driver Information Centrewhen required.Confirm messages by pressing 9.Vehicle messages 3 123.

Trip/fuel information menu, ;or InfoThe following list contains all possibleInfo Menu pages. Some may not beavailable for your particular vehicle.Depending on the display, somefunctions are symbolised.Turn the adjuster wheel or press Qor P to select a page:● Trip odometer 1/2 or A/B● Average fuel consumption● Average speed● Digital speed● Fuel range● Instantaneous fuel consumption● Remaining oil life● Tyre pressure● Traffic sign assistant● Following distance● Timer● Outside temperature


On Midlevel display the pagesRemaining Oil Life, Tyre Pressure,Traffic Sign Assistant and FollowingDistance are displayed in the Vehicleinformation menu, select ?.

Trip odometer 1/2 or A/BTrip odometer displays the currentdistance since a certain reset.Trip odometer counts up to a distanceof 9,999 km then restarts at 0.To reset on Midlevel display, pressSET/CLR for a few seconds.To reset on Uplevel display, press >and confirm with 9.The information of trip odometer page1/A and 2/B can be reset separatelywhile the respective display is active.

Average Fuel ConsumptionDisplay of average consumption. Themeasurement can be reset at anytime and starts with a default value.To reset on Midlevel display, pressSET/CLR for a few seconds, onUplevel display, press > and confirmwith 9.

On vehicles with bi-fuel engines:Average consumption is indicated forthe currently selected mode, CNG orpetrol.

Average speedDisplay of average speed. Themeasurement can be reset at anytime.To reset on Midlevel display, pressSET/CLR for a few seconds, onUplevel display, press > and confirmwith 9.

Digital speedDigital display of the instantaneousspeed.

Fuel rangeRange is calculated from current fuellevel and current consumption. Thedisplay shows average values.After refuelling, the range is updatedautomatically after a brief delay.When the level in the fuel tank is low,a message appears on the displayand the control indicator Y in the fuelgauge illuminates.

When the fuel tank must be refuelledimmediately, a warning messageappears and remains on the display.Additionally, control indicator Y in thefuel gauge flashes 3 113.

Fuel range, bi-fuel engine

Display of the approximate total fuelrange and for each fuel tank (CNGand petrol). A low fuel level in eithertank is indicated by Low in therespective section.


Fuel level, bi-fuel engine

For bi-fuel engines, the DriverInformation Centre displays the fuellevel for the fuel type which iscurrently not in operation.

Instantaneous Fuel ConsumptionDisplay of the instantaneousconsumption.On vehicles with bi-fuel engines:Instantaneous consumption isindicated for the currently selectedmode, CNG or petrol.

Remaining Oil LifeIndicates an estimate of the oil'suseful life. The number in percentagemeans the remainder of current oil life3 108.

Tyre PressureChecks tyre pressure of all wheelsduring driving 3 255.

Traffic sign assistantDisplays the detected traffic signs forthe current route section 3 211.

Following DistanceDisplays the distance in seconds to apreceding moving vehicle 3 196. IfAdaptive cruise control is active thispage shows the following distancesetting instead.

TimerTo start and stop, press 9. To reset,press > and confirm reset.

Outside temperatureDisplay of current outsidetemperature.

Eco information menu, @● Top consumers● Economy trend● Eco index

On Uplevel display the pages TopConsumers, Economy Trend and Ecoindex, are displayed in the Trip/fuelinformation menu, select Info.

Top ConsumersList of top comfort consumerscurrently switched on is displayed indescending order. Fuel savingpotential is indicated.During sporadic driving conditions,the engine will activate the heatedrear window automatically to increasethe engine load. In this event, theheated rear window is indicated asone of the top consumers, withoutactivation by the driver.


Economy Trend

Displays the average consumptiondevelopment over a distance of50 km. Filled segments display theconsumption in 5 km steps and showsthe effect of topography or drivingbehaviour on fuel consumption.

Economy indexThe current fuel consumption isindicated on an economic scale. Foreconomical driving, adapt drivingstyle to keep the filled segmentswithin the Eco area. The moresegments are filled, the higher thefuel consumption.

Simultaneously the averageconsumption value is indicated.

Audio menuAudio menu enables browsing formusic, selecting from favourites orchanging the audio source.See Infotainment manual.

Phone menuPhone menu enables managing andperforming of phone calls, scrollingthrough contacts or operatinghandsfree phoning.See Infotainment manual.

Navigation menuNavigation menu enables routeguidance.See Infotainment manual.

Vehicle information menu, ? orOptionsThe following list contains all possibleOptions Menu pages. Some may notbe available for your particularvehicle. Depending on the displaysome functions are symbolised.

Turn the adjuster wheel or press Qor P to select a page and follow theinstructions given in the submenus:● Units● Info pages● Speed warning● Tyre loading● Software information

UnitsPress SET/CLR or > while units isdisplayed. Select imperial or metricunits by turning adjuster wheel orpressing P. Confirm by pressingSET/CLR or 9.

Info pagesPress > while Info pages is displayed.A list of all items in the Info Menu isdisplayed. Select the functions to bedisplayed in the Info page by pressing9. Selected pages have a 9 in acheckbox. Non-viewable functionshave a blank checkbox. See InfoMenu above.


Speed warning

The speed warning function alerts thedriver when a set speed is exceeded.To set the speed warning, pressSET/CLR or > while the page isdisplayed. Turn the adjuster wheel orpress Q or P to select and adjust thevalue. Press SET/CLR or 9 to set thespeed. Once the speed is set, thisfeature can be turned off by pressingSET/CLR or 9 while viewing thispage. If the selected speed limit isexceeded, a pop-up warning isdisplayed with a chime.

Tyre LoadThe tyre pressure category accordingto the actual tyre inflation pressurecan be selected 3 255.

Software informationDisplays the open source softwareinformation.

Info displayThe Info-Display is located in theinstrument panel near the instrumentcluster.Depending on the vehicleconfiguration the vehicle has a● Graphic-Info-Display

or● 7'' Colour-Info-Display with

touchscreen functionalityor

● 8'' Colour-Info-Display withtouchscreen functionality

The vehicle has a 7'' Colour-Info-Display with touchscreenfunctionality.

The vehicle has a 8'' Colour-Info-Display with touchscreenfunctionality.The Info displays can indicate:● time 3 95● outside temperature 3 95● date 3 95● Infotainment system, see

description in the Infotainmentmanual

● indication of rear view camera3 209

● indication of parking assistinstructions 3 200

● navigation, see description in theInfotainment manual

● system messages● settings for vehicle

personalisation 3 125


Graphic-Info-Display

Press X to switch on the display.Press MENU to select main menupage.Turn MENU to select a menu page.Press MENU to confirm a selection.Press BACK to exit a menu withoutchanging a setting.

7'' Colour-Info-Display

Selecting menus and settingsMenus and settings are accessed viathe display.

Press X to switch on the display.Press ; to display the homepage.Touch required menu display iconwith the finger.Touch a respective icon to confirm aselection.Touch 9 to return to the next highermenu level.Press ; to return to the homepage.For further information, seeInfotainment manual.Vehicle personalisation 3 125.

8'' Colour-Info-Display

Selecting menus and settingsThere are three options to operate thedisplay:● via buttons below the display● by touching the touchscreen with

the finger● via speech recognition

Button operation

Press X to switch on the display.Press ; to display the homepage.Turn MENU to select a menu displayicon or a function or to scroll asubmenu list.


Press MENU to confirm a selection.Press BACK to exit a menu withoutchanging a setting.Press ; to return to the homepage.For further information, seeInfotainment manual.Touchscreen operationDisplay must be switched on bypressing X. Press ; to selecthomepage.Touch required menu display icon ora function with the finger.Scroll a longer submenu list with thefinger up or down.Confirm a required function orselection by touching.Touch q on the display to exit amenu without changing a setting.Press ; to return to the homepage.For further information, seeInfotainment manual.Speech recognitionDescription see Infotainment manual.Vehicle personalisation 3 125.

Valet modeSome functions of the DriverInformation Centre and the Info-Display can be limited for somedrivers. The load compartment isbeing locked and cannot be unlocked.For more information, seeInfotainment manual.

Vehicle messagesMessages are indicated in the DriverInformation Centre, in some casestogether with a warning and signalchime.

On Midlevel display press SET/CLRon the turn signal lever to confirm amessage.


On Uplevel display press 9 on thesteering wheel to confirm a message.

Vehicle and service messagesThe vehicle messages are displayedas text. Follow the instructions givenin the messages.

Messages in theColour-Info-DisplaySome important messages mayappear additionally in theColour-Info-Display. Somemessages only pop-up for a fewseconds.

Warning chimesWhen starting the engine or whilstdrivingOnly one warning chime will sound ata time.The warning chime regarding notfastened seat belts has priority overany other warning chime.● If seat belt is not fastened.● If a door or the tailgate is not fully

closed when starting off.● If a certain speed is exceeded

with parking brake applied.● If adaptive cruise control

deactivates automatically.● If approaching a vehicle ahead

too closely.● If a programmed speed or speed

limit is exceeded.● If a warning message appears in

the Driver Information Centre.● If the electronic key is not in the

passenger compartment.● If the parking assist detects an

object.

● If an unintended lane changeoccurs.

● If the diesel particle filter hasreached the maximum fillinglevel.

● If safety function of the powertailgate detects obstacles in themoving area.

When the vehicle is parked and/orthe driver's door is opened● With exterior lights on.

During an Autostop● If the driver's door is opened.● If any condition for an autostart is

not fulfilled.

Battery voltageWhen the vehicle battery voltage isrunning low, a warning message willappear in the Driver InformationCentre.


1. Switch off any electricalconsumers which are not requiredfor a safe drive, e.g. seat heating,heated rear window or other mainconsumers.

2. Charge the vehicle battery bydriving continuously for a while orby using a charging device.

The warning message will disappearafter the engine has been startedtwice without a voltage drop.If the vehicle battery cannot berecharged, have the cause of the faultremedied by a workshop.

Vehicle personalisationThe vehicle's behaviour can bepersonalised by changing the settingsin the Info-Display.Some of the personal settings fordifferent drivers can be memorisedindividually for each vehicle key.Memorised settings 3 24.Depending on vehicle equipment andcountry-specific regulations some ofthe functions described below maynot be available.Some functions are only displayed oractive when the engine is running.

Personal settingsGraphic-Info-DisplayPress MENU to open the respectivemenu.Select Settings, scroll through the listand select Vehicle Settings

In the corresponding submenus thefollowing settings can be changed:

Vehicle Settings● Climate and Air Quality

Auto Fan Max Speed: Modifiesthe level of the cabin airflow of theclimate control in automaticmode.Auto Heated Seats:Automatically activates the seatheating.Auto Demist: Supportswindscreen dehumidification byautomatically selecting thenecessary settings andautomatic air conditioning mode.


Auto Rear Demist: Automaticallyactivates heated rear window.

● Park Assist / Collision DetectionForward Collision Alert: Activatesor deactivates forward collisionalert.Collision Preparation: Activatesor deactivates the automaticbrake functionality of the vehiclein the event of imminent collisiondanger. The following isselectable: the system will takeover brake control, warn bychimes only or is deactivatedcompletely.Park Assist: Activates ordeactivates the parking assist.Activation is selectable with orwithout attached trailer hitch.Go Notifier: Activates ordeactivates the reminder to driveoff when the adaptive cruisecontrol holds the vehicle atstandstill.Side Blind Zone Alert: Activatesor deactivates side blind zonealert.

● Comfort SettingsAuto Memory Recall: Changesthe settings to the recall ofmemorised settings for powerseat adjustment.Easy Exit Driver Seat: Activatesor deactivates easy exit functionof the power seat.Chime Volume: Changes thevolume of warning chimes.Personalisation by Driver:Activates or deactivates thepersonalisation function.Rain Sense Wipers: Activates ordeactivates automatic wipingwith rain sensor.Rear Auto Wipe in Reverse:Activates or deactivatesautomatic switching on of therear window wiper when reversegear is engaged.

● Exterior Ambient LightingExterior lighting by unlocking:Activates or deactivates the entrylighting.Duration upon exit of vehicle:Activates or deactivates and

changes the duration of exitlighting.Left or Right Hand Traffic:Changes between lighting for leftor right-hand traffic.Adaptive Forward Lighting:Changes the settings of thefunctions of the LED headlights.

● Power Door LocksStop door lock if door open:Activates or deactivates the doorlocking function while a door isopen.Auto Door Lock: Activates ordeactivates the automatic doorlocking function after switchingon ignition.Delayed Door Lock: Activates ordeactivates the delayed doorlocking function. This featuredelays the actual locking of thedoors until all doors are closed.

● Remote Lock, Unlock, and StartRemote Unlock Feedback:Activates or deactivates thehazard warning flasher feedbackwhilst unlocking.


Remote Lock Feedback:Changes what kind of feedbackis given when locking the vehicle.Remote Door Unlock: Changesthe configuration to unlock onlythe driver's door or the wholevehicle whilst unlocking.Auto Relock Doors: Activates ordeactivates the automatic relockfunction after unlocking withoutopening the vehicle.Remote Window Operation:Activates or deactivates theoperation of power windows withremote control.Passive Door Unlock: Changesthe configuration to unlock onlythe driver's door or the wholevehicle whilst unlocking.Passive Door Lock: Activates ordeactivates the passive lockingfunction. This feature locks thevehicle automatically afterseveral seconds if all doors havebeen closed and an electronickey has been removed from thevehicle.

Remote Left in Vehicle Alarm:Activates or deactivates thewarning chime when theelectronic key remains in thevehicle.

● Restore Factory Settings:Resets all settings to the defaultsettings.

● Valet Mode:See Infotainment manual.

Personal settings7" Colour-Info-DisplayPress ;, select Settings and thenVehicle on the touch-screen.


Vehicle● Climate & Air Quality

Auto Fan Max Speed: Modifiesthe level of the cabin airflow of theclimate control in automaticmode.Auto Heated Seats:Automatically activates the seatheating.Auto Defog: Supportswindscreen dehumidification byautomatically selecting thenecessary settings andautomatic air conditioning mode.Auto Rear Defog: Automaticallyactivates heated rear window.

● Collision / Detection SystemsForward Collision Alert :Activates or deactivates forwardcollision alert.Auto Collision Preparation:Activates or deactivates theautomatic brake functionality ofthe vehicle in the event ofimminent collision danger. The


following is selectable: thesystem will take over brakecontrol, warn by chimes only or isdeactivated completely.Forward Collision System:Changes the settings of forwardcollision alert.Park Assist: Activates ordeactivates the ultrasonicparking assist. Activation isselectable with or withoutattached trailer coupling.Go Notifier: Activates ordeactivates the reminder to driveoff when the adaptive cruisecontrol holds the vehicle atstandstill.Side Blind Zone Alert: Activatesor deactivates side blind zonealert.

● Comfort and ConvenienceAuto Memory Recall : Changesthe settings to the recall ofmemorised settings for powerseat adjustment.Easy Exit Driver Seat: Activatesor deactivates easy exit functionof the power seat.

Chime Volume: Changes thevolume of warning chimes.Personalization By Driver:Activates or deactivates thepersonalisation function.Rain Sense Wipers: Activates ordeactivates automatic wipingwith rain sensor.Auto Wipe in Reverse Gear:Activates or deactivatesautomatic switching on of therear window wiper when reversegear is engaged.

● LightingVehicle Locator Lights: Activatesor deactivates the entry lighting.Exit Lighting: Activates ordeactivates and changes theduration of exit lighting.Left or Right Hand Traffic :Changes between lighting for leftor right-hand traffic.Adaptive Forward Lighting :Changes the settings of thefunctions of the LED headlights.

● Power Door LocksUnlocked Door Anti Lock Out:Activates or deactivates the doorlocking function while a door isopen.Auto Door Lock: Activates ordeactivates the automatic doorlocking function after switchingon ignition.Delayed Door Lock: Activates ordeactivates the delayed doorlocking function. This featuredelays the actual locking of thedoors until all doors are closed.

● Remote Lock, Unlock, StartRemote Unlock Light Feedback:Activates or deactivates thehazard warning flasher feedbackwhilst unlocking.Remote Lock Feedback:Changes what kind of feedbackis given when locking the vehicle.Remote Door Unlock: Changesthe configuration to unlock onlythe driver's door or the wholevehicle whilst unlocking.Relock Remotely UnlockedDoors: Activates or deactivates


the automatic relock functionafter unlocking without openingthe vehicle.Remote Window Operation:Activates or deactivates theoperation of power windows withremote control.Passive Door Unlock: Changesthe configuration to unlock onlythe driver's door or the wholevehicle whilst unlocking.Passive Door Lock : Activates ordeactivates the passive lockingfunction. This feature locks thevehicle automatically afterseveral seconds if all doors havebeen closed and an electronickey has been removed from thevehicle.Remote Left in Vehicle Alert:Activates or deactivates thewarning chime when theelectronic key remains in thevehicle.

Personal settings8" Colour-Info-Display

Press ; then select the SETTINGSicon.


Vehicle● Climate and Air Quality

Auto Fan Speed: Modifies thelevel of the cabin airflow of theclimate control in automaticmode.Auto Heated Seats:Automatically activates the seatheating.Auto Demist: Supportswindscreen dehumidification by

automatically selecting thenecessary settings andautomatic air conditioning mode.Auto Rear Demist: Automaticallyactivates heated rear window.

● Collision / Detection SystemsForward Collision Alert: Activatesor deactivates forward collisionalert.Auto Collision Preparation:Activates or deactivates theautomatic brake functionality ofthe vehicle in the event ofimminent collision danger. Thefollowing is selectable: thesystem will take over brakecontrol, warn by chimes only or isdeactivated completely.Park Assist: Activates ordeactivates the ultrasonicparking assist. Activation isselectable with or withoutattached trailer coupling.Go Notifier: Activates ordeactivates the reminder functionof the adaptive cruise control.


Side Blind Zone Alert: Activatesor deactivates side blind zonealert.

● Comfort and ConvenienceAuto Memory Recall: Changesthe settings to the recall ofmemorised settings for powerseat adjustment.Easy Exit Driver Seat: Activatesor deactivates easy exit functionof the power seat.Chime Volume: Changes thevolume of warning chimes.Personalisation by Driver:Activates or deactivates thepersonalisation function.Rainsense Wipers: Activates ordeactivates automatic wipingwith rain sensor.Auto Wipe in Reverse Gear:Activates or deactivatesautomatic switching on of therear window wiper when reversegear is engaged.

● LightingVehicle Locator Lights: Activatesor deactivates the entry lighting.

Exit Lighting: Activates ordeactivates and changes theduration of exit lighting.Left or Right Hand Traffic:Changes between lighting for leftor right-hand traffic.Adaptive Forward Lighting:Changes the settings of thefunctions of the LED headlights.

● Power Door LocksUnlocked Door Anti-Lockout:Activates or deactivates the doorlocking function while a door isopen.Auto Door Lock: Activates ordeactivates the automatic doorlocking function after switchingon ignition.Delayed Door Lock: Activates ordeactivates the delayed doorlocking function. This featuredelays the actual locking of thedoors until all doors are closed.

● Remote Lock, Unlock, StartRemote Unlock Light Feedback:Activates or deactivates thehazard warning flasher feedbackwhilst unlocking.

Remote Lock Feedback:Changes what kind of feedbackis given when locking the vehicle.Remote Door Unlock: Changesthe configuration to unlock onlythe driver's door or the wholevehicle whilst unlocking.Relock Remote Unlocked Doors:Activates or deactivates theautomatic relock function afterunlocking without opening thevehicle.Remote Window Operation:Activates or deactivates theoperation of power windows withremote control.Passive Door Unlock: Changesthe configuration to unlock onlythe driver's door or the wholevehicle whilst unlocking.Passive Door Lock: Activates ordeactivates the passive lockingfunction. This feature locks thevehicle automatically afterseveral seconds if all doors havebeen closed and an electronickey has been removed from thevehicle.


Remote Left in Vehicle Alert:Activates or deactivates thewarning chime when theelectronic key remains in thevehicle.

Telematics serviceOnStarOnStar is a personal connectivity andservice assistant with integratedWi-Fi hotspot. The OnStar service isavailable 24 hours a day, seven daysa week.NoteOnStar is not available for allmarkets. For further information,contact your workshop.NoteIn order to be available andoperational, OnStar needs a validOnStar subscription, functioningvehicle electrics, mobile service andGPS satellite link.

To activate the OnStar services andset up an account, press Z and speakwith an advisor.

Depending on the equipment of thevehicle, the following services areavailable:● Emergency services and support

in the case of a vehiclebreakdown

● Wi-Fi hotspot● Smartphone application● Remote control, e.g. location of

the vehicle, activation of horn andlights, control of central lockingsystem

● Stolen vehicle assistance● Vehicle diagnostics● Destination downloadNoteThe OnStar module of the vehicle isdeactivated after ten days without anignition cycle. Functions requiring adata connection will be availableagain after switching on the ignition.


OnStar buttons

Privacy buttonPress and hold j until a message isheard to activate or deactivate thetransmission of the vehicle location.Press j to answer a call or to end acall to an advisor.Press j to access the Wi-Fi settings.

Service buttonPress Z to establish a connection toan advisor.

SOS buttonPress [ to establish a priorityemergency connection to a speciallytrained emergency advisor.

Status LEDGreen: The system is ready withactivated transmission of the vehiclelocation.Green flashing: The system is on acall.Red: A problem arose.Off: The system is ready withdeactivated transmission of thevehicle location or the system is instandby mode.Red / green flashing for a short periodof time: The transmission of thevehicle location has beendeactivated.

OnStar services

General servicesIf you need any information e.g.opening hours, points of interest anddestinations or if you need anysupport e.g. in the case of a vehicle

breakdown, a flat tyre and empty fueltank, press Z to establish aconnection to an advisor.

Emergency servicesIn the case of an emergency situation,press [ and talk to an advisor. Theadvisor then contacts emergency orassistance service providers anddirects them to your vehicle.In the case of an accident withactivation of airbags or belttensioners, an automatic emergencycall is established. The advisor isimmediately connected to yourvehicle to see whether help isneeded.

Wi-Fi hotspotThe Wi-Fi hotspot of the vehicleprovides internet connectivity with amaximum speed of 4G/LTE.NoteThe Wi-Fi hotspot functionality is notavailable for all markets.

Up to seven devices may beconnected.


To connect a mobile device with theWi-Fi hotspot:1. Press j and then select Wi-Fi

settings on the Info-Display. Thesettings displayed include the Wi-Fi hotspot name (SSID),password and connection type.

2. Start a Wi-Fi network search onyour mobile device.

3. Select your vehicle hotspot(SSID) when listed.

4. When prompted, enter thepassword on your mobile device.

NoteTo change the SSID or password,press Z and talk to an advisor or login to your account.

To switch off the Wi-Fi hotspotfunctionality, press Z to call anadvisor.

Smartphone appWith the myOpel smartphone app,some vehicle functions can beoperated remotely.

The following functions are available:● Lock or unlock vehicle.● Honk horn or flash lights.● Check fuel level, engine oil life

and tyre pressure (only with tyrepressure monitoring system).

● Send navigation destination tothe vehicle, if equipped with abuilt-in navigation system.

● Locate vehicle on a map.● Manage Wi-Fi settings.

To operate these functions, downloadthe app from App Store® orGoogle Play™ Store.

Remote controlIf desired, use any phone to call anadvisor, who can remotely operatespecific vehicle functions. Find therespective OnStar phone number onour country-specific website.The following functions are available:● Lock or unlock vehicle.● Provide information on the

vehicle location.● Honk horn or flash lights.

Stolen vehicle assistanceIf the vehicle is stolen, report the theftto the authorities and request OnStarstolen vehicle assistance. Use anyphone to call an advisor. Find therespective OnStar phone number onour country-specific website.OnStar can provide support inlocating and recovering the vehicle.Theft alertWhen the anti-theft alarm system istriggered, a notification is sent toOnStar. You are then informed aboutthis event by text message or email.Restart preventionBy sending remote signals, OnStarcan prevent the vehicle fromrestarting once it has been turned off.

On-demand diagnosticsAt any time e.g. if the vehicle displaysa vehicle message, press Z tocontact an advisor and ask tocomplete a real-time diagnostic checkto directly determine the issue.Depending on the results, the advisorwill provide further support.


Diagnostic reportThe vehicle automatically transmitsdiagnostic data to OnStar whichsends a monthly email report to youand your preferred workshop.NoteThe workshop notification functioncan be disabled in your account.

The report contains the status of keyoperating systems of the vehicle likeengine, transmission, airbags, ABS,and other major systems. It alsoprovides information on possiblemaintenance items and tyre pressure(only with tyre pressure monitoringsystem).To look at the information in greaterdetail, select the link within the emailand log in to your account.

Destination downloadA desired destination can be directlydownloaded to the navigation system.Press Z to call an advisor anddescribe the destination or point ofinterest.

The advisor can look up any addressor point of interest and directly sendthe destination to the built-innavigation system.

OnStar settings

OnStar PINTo have full access to all OnStarservices, a four-digit PIN is required.The PIN has to be personalised whenfirst talking to an advisor.To change the PIN, press Z to call anadvisor.

Account dataAn OnStar subscriber has an accountwhere all the data is stored. Torequest a change of the accountinformation, press Z and talk to anadvisor or log in to your account.If the OnStar service is used onanother vehicle, press Z and requestthat the account be transferred to thenew vehicle.

NoteIn any case, if the vehicle is disposedof, sold or otherwise transferred,immediately inform OnStar aboutthe changes and terminate theOnStar service on this vehicle.

Vehicle locationThe vehicle location is transmitted toOnStar when service is requested ortriggered. A message on the Info-Display informs about thistransmission.To activate or deactivate thetransmission of the vehicle location,press and hold j until an audiomessage is heard.The deactivation is indicated by thestatus light flashing red and green fora short period of time and each timethe vehicle is started.NoteIf the transmission of the vehiclelocation is deactivated, someservices are no longer available.


NoteThe vehicle location always remainsaccessible to OnStar in the case ofan emergency.

Find the privacy policy in youraccount.

Software updatesOnStar may remotely carry outsoftware updates without furthernotice or consent. These updates areto enhance or maintain safety andsecurity or the operation of thevehicle.These updates may concern privacyissues. Find the privacy policy in youraccount.

136 Lighting

Lighting

Exterior lighting .......................... 136Light switch .............................. 136Automatic light control ............. 137High beam ............................... 137Headlight flash ......................... 137Headlight range adjustment .... 137Headlights when drivingabroad .................................... 138

Daytime running lights ............. 138LED headlights ........................ 138Hazard warning flashers .......... 141Turn and lane-change signals . 142Front fog lights ......................... 142Rear fog light ........................... 143Parking lights ........................... 143Reversing lights ....................... 143Misted light covers ................... 143

Interior lighting ........................... 144Instrument panel illuminationcontrol ..................................... 144

Interior lights ............................ 144Reading lights .......................... 144Sunvisor lights ......................... 145

Lighting features ........................ 145Centre console lighting ............ 145

Entry lighting ............................ 145Exit lighting .............................. 145Battery discharge protection .... 146

Exterior lightingLight switch

Turn light switch:AUTO : automatic light control

switches automaticallybetween daytime runninglight and headlight

8 : sidelights9 : headlights

When switching on the ignition,automatic light control is active.Control indicator 8 3 114.

Lighting 137

Tail lightsTail lights are illuminated togetherwith low/high beam and sidelights.

Automatic light control

When the automatic light controlfunction is switched on and theengine is running, the systemswitches between daytime runninglights and headlights automaticallydepending on the external lightingconditions and information given bythe rain sensor system.Daytime running light 3 138.

Automatic headlight activationDuring poor lighting conditionsheadlights are switched on.Additionally, headlights are switchedon if the windscreen wipers havebeen activated for several wipes.LED headlights 3 138

Tunnel detectionWhen a tunnel is entered headlightsare switched on immediately.

High beam

Push lever to switch from low to highbeam.

Pull lever to deactivate high beam.High beam assist 3 138.

Headlight flashTo activate the headlight flash, pulllever.Pulling lever deactivates high beam.LED headlights 3 138.

Headlight range adjustmentManual headlight rangeadjustment

138 Lighting

To adapt headlight range to thevehicle load to prevent dazzling: turnthumb wheel ? to required position.0 : front seats occupied1 : all seats occupied2 : all seats occupied and load

compartment laden3 : driver's seat occupied and load

compartment laden

Dynamic automatic headlightlevelling 3 138.

Headlights when drivingabroadThe asymmetrical headlight beamextends visibility at the edge of theroad at the passenger side.However, when driving in countrieswhere traffic drives on the oppositeside of the road, adjust the headlightsto prevent dazzling of oncomingtraffic.

Vehicles with halogen headlightsystemThe headlights do not have to beadjusted.

Vehicles with LED headlightHeadlights can be set for driving onthe opposite side of the road in thevehicle personalisation menu via theInfo-Display.Select the relevant setting in Settings,I Vehicle.Info-Display 3 121.Vehicle personalisation 3 125.Every time the ignition is switched on,f flashes for approx. four seconds asa reminder.To deactivate, use the sameprocedure as described above. f willnot flash when function isdeactivated.Control indicator f 3 114.

Daytime running lightsDaytime running lights increasesvisibility of the vehicle during daylight.They are switched on automaticallyduring daytime when engine isrunning.

The system switches betweendaytime running lights and headlightsautomatically, depending on thelighting conditions. Automatic lightcontrol 3 137.

LED headlightsLED headlight system contains avariety of particular LEDs in eachheadlight which enables the control ofdifferent lighting programs.Light distribution and intensity of lightare variably triggered depending onthe lighting conditions, road type anddriving situation. The vehicle adaptsthe headlights automatically to thesituation to enable optimal lightperformance for the driver.Some functions of the LED headlightscan be deactivated or activated in thevehicle personalisation menu. Selectthe relevant setting in Settings, IVehicle in the Info-Display. Vehiclepersonalisation 3 125.High beam assist can not bedeactivated.

Lighting 139

The following lighting functions areavailable with light switch in positionAUTO or 9.

Town light

Activated automatically at a speed upto approx. 55 km/h and in situationswith exterior ambient light. The light iswide and symmetrical. A specialbeam pattern is designed to avoidglare for other road users.

Country light

Activated automatically at a speedabove approx. 55 km/h when drivingin rural areas. The illumination of the

current lane and the side of the roadis improved. Oncoming andpreceding vehicles are not dazzled.

Curve light

Particular LEDs, based on steeringangle and speed, are additionallytriggered to improve lighting incurves. This function is activated atspeeds from 40 km/h to 70 km/h andreacts to steering angle.

Corner light

When turning off, depending on thesteering angle and the turn signallight, particular LEDs are triggered

which illuminate the direction oftravel. It is activated up to a speed of40 km/h.

Reverse parking functionTo assist driver's orientation whenparking, both corner lights andreversing light illuminate whenheadlights are on and reverse gear isengaged. They remain illuminated fora short time after disengaging reversegear or until driving faster than7 km/h in a forward gear.

High beam assistThis feature allows the high beam tofunction as main driving light at night.The camera in the windscreendetects the lights of oncoming orpreceding vehicles. Each LED onright or left side can be triggered orfaded out particulary according to thetraffic situation. This gives the bestlight distribution without glaring otherroad users. Once activated, highbeam assist remains active andswitches high beam on and offdepending on surrounding

140 Lighting

conditions. The latest setting of thehigh beam assist will remain after theignition is switched on again.

High beam assist includes a specialmotorway mode. When driving fasterthan 115 km/h on motorways, the lightbeam becomes smaller to avoidglaring of oncoming traffic. Whenfollowing vehicles ahead or passing,mirror glaring for these vehicles isreduced.

ActivationIndicator lever with or without MENUbutton

Activate high beam assist by pushingthe indicator lever twice. High beam isswitched on automatically at a speedabove 50 km/h. High beam isswitched off at a speed below35 km/h, but high beam assistremains active.

Indicator lever with f button

Activate high beam assist by pressingf once. High beam is switched onautomatically at a speed above50 km/h. High beam is switched off ata speed below 35 km/h, but highbeam assist remains active.The green control indicator filluminates continuously when thehigh beam assist is activated, the blueone 7 illuminates when high beam ison.Control indicator f 3 114, 73 114.

Lighting 141

Pressing indicator lever onceswitches on manual high beamwithout high beam assist.High beam assist switchesautomatically to low beam when:● Driving in urban areas.● Reverse parking function is

active.● Front or rear fog lights are

switched on.If there are no restrictions detected,the system switches back to highbeam.

DeactivationIndicator lever with or without MENUbuttonIf high beam assist is active and highbeam is on, pull indicator lever onceto deactivate high beam assist.If high beam assist is active and highbeam is off, push indicator lever twiceto deactivate high beam assist.Pushing the indicator lever to activatemanual high beam will alsodeactivate high beam assist.

Indicator lever with f buttonIf high beam assist is active and highbeam is on, press f once or pullindicator lever once to deactivate highbeam assist.If high beam assist is active and highbeam is off, press f once todeactivate high beam assist.Pushing the indicator lever to activatemanual high beam will alsodeactivate high beam assist.Headlight flash in conjunction withhigh beam assistHeadlight flash by pulling indicatorlever once will not deactivate highbeam assist when high beam is off.Headlight flash by pulling indicatorlever once deactivates high beamassist when high beam is on.

Dynamic automatic headlightlevellingTo prevent oncoming traffic frombeing dazzled, headlight levelling isautomatically adjusted based oninclination information measured byfront and rear axle, acceleration ordeceleration and vehicle speed.

Headlights when driving abroad3 138.

Fault in LED headlight systemWhen the system detects a failure inthe LED headlight system, it selects apreset position to avoid dazzling ofoncoming traffic. A warning isdisplayed in the Driver InformationCentre.

Hazard warning flashersOperated by pressing ¨.

142 Lighting

The illustrations show differentversions.In the event of an accident with airbagdeployment, the hazard warningflashers are activated automatically.

Turn and lane-changesignals

lever up : right turn signallever down : left turn signal

A resistance point can be felt whenmoving the lever.Constant flashing is activated whenthe lever is being moved beyond theresistance point. It is deactivatedwhen the steering wheel is moved inthe opposite direction or lever ismanually moved back to its neutralposition.

Activate temporary flashing byholding the lever just before theresistance point. Turning lights willflash until lever is being released.To activate three flashes, tap thelever briefly without passing theresistance point.With a trailer connected, turn signalflashes six times and tone frequencychanges when pressing the lever untilresistance is felt and then releasing.

Front fog lights

Operated by pressing >.

Lighting 143

Light switch in position AUTO:switching on front fog lights will switchheadlights on automatically.

Rear fog light

Operated by pressing ø.Light switch in position AUTO:switching on rear fog light will switchheadlights on automatically.Light switch in position 8: rear foglight can only be switched on withfront fog lights.

The vehicle rear fog light isdeactivated when towing a trailer or aplug is connected with the socket, e.g. when a bicycle carrier is used.

Parking lights

When the vehicle is parked, theparking lights on one side can beactivated:1. Switch off ignition.2. Move turn signal lever all the way

up (right parking lights) or down(left parking lights).

Confirmed by a signal and thecorresponding turn signal controlindicator.

Reversing lightsThe reversing light comes on whenthe ignition is on and reverse gear isselected.

Misted light coversThe inside of the light housing maymist up briefly in poor, wet and coldweather conditions, in heavy rain orafter washing. The mist disappearsquickly by itself; to help switch on theheadlights.

144 Lighting

Interior lightingInstrument panelillumination control

Brightness of the following lights canbe adjusted in position AUTO whenthe light sensor detects nightconditions, or in position 8 or 9.● instrument panel illumination● Info-Display● illuminated switches and

operation elementsTurn thumb wheel A and hold untilthe desired brightness is obtained.

Interior lightsDuring entry and exit of the vehicle,the front and rear courtesy lightsautomatically switch on and then offafter a delay.NoteIn the event of an accident withairbag deployment the courtesylights are turned on automatically.

Front courtesy light

Operate rocker switch:w : automatic switching on

and offpress u : onpress v : off

Rear courtesy lightsIlluminate in conjunction with the frontcourtesy light depending on rockerswitch position.

Reading lights

Operated by pressing s and t in thecourtesy lights.

Lighting 145

Sunvisor lightsIlluminates when the cover is opened.

Lighting featuresCentre console lightingSpotlight incorporated in the interiorlighting comes on when headlightsare switched on.

Entry lightingWelcome lightingThe following lights are switched onfor a short time by unlocking thevehicle with the radio remote control:● headlights● tail lights● number plate lights● instrument panel light● interior lights

Some functions are only operablewhen it is dark outside to facilitatelocating the vehicle.The lighting switches off immediatelywhen the ignition is switched on.Starting off 3 17.

This function can be activated ordeactivated in the vehiclepersonalisation.Select the relevant setting in Settings,I Vehicle in the Info-Display.Info-Display 3 121.Vehicle personalisation 3 125.The settings can be saved for the keybeing used 3 24.The following lights will additionallyswitch on when the driver's door isopened:● illumination of some switches● Driver Information Centre● door pocket lights

Exit lightingThe following lights switch on if thekey is removed from the ignitionswitch:● interior lights● instrument panel light

146 Lighting

They will switch off automatically aftera delay. This function works only inthe dark. Theatre lighting is activatedif the driver's door is opened duringthis time.

Path lightingHeadlights, tail lights and numberplate lights illuminate the surroundingarea for an adjustable time afterleaving the vehicle.

Activating

1. Switch off the ignition.2. Remove the ignition key.3. Open the driver's door.

4. Pull the turn signal lever.5. Close the driver's door.

If the driver's door is not closed, thelights switch off after two minutes.Exit lighting is switched offimmediately if the turn signal lever ispulled while the driver's door is open.This function can be activated ordeactivated in the vehiclepersonalisation.Select the relevant setting in Settings,I Vehicle in the Info-Display.Info-Display 3 121.Vehicle personalisation 3 125.The settings can be saved for the keybeing used 3 24.

Battery discharge protectionVehicle battery state of chargefunctionThe function guarantees longestvehicle battery life via a generatorwith controllable power output andoptimised power distribution.

To prevent discharge of the vehiclebattery when driving, the followingsystems are reduced automatically intwo stages and finally switched off:● auxiliary heater● heated rear window and mirrors● heated seats● fan

In the second stage, a messagewhich confirms the activation of thevehicle battery discharge protectionwill be displayed in the DriverInformation Centre.

Switching off electric lightsTo prevent discharge of the vehiclebattery when the ignition is switchedoff, some interior lights are switchedoff automatically after some time.

Climate control 147

Climate control

Climate control systems ............. 147Heating and ventilation system 147Air conditioning system ........... 148Electronic climate controlsystem .................................... 150

Auxiliary heater ........................ 155Air vents ..................................... 155

Adjustable air vents ................. 155Fixed air vents ......................... 155

Maintenance .............................. 156Air intake ................................. 156Pollen filter ............................... 156Air conditioning regularoperation ................................ 156

Service .................................... 156

Climate control systemsHeating and ventilationsystem

Controls for:● temperature● air distribution l, M and K● fan speed Z● demisting and defrosting V

Heated rear window Ü 3 43.Heated exterior mirrors Ü 3 40.Heated seats ß 3 54.Heated steering wheel * 3 92.

Temperaturered : warmblue : cold

Heating will not be fully effective untilthe engine has reached normaloperating temperature.

Air distributionl : to windscreen and front door

windowsM : to head area via adjustable air

ventsK : to foot well and windscreen

All combinations are possible.

Fan speedAdjust the air flow by switching the fanto the desired speed.

148 Climate control

Demisting and defrosting


● Set temperature control towarmest level.

● Set fan speed to highest level.● Switch on heated rear window Ü.● Open side air vents as required


Air conditioning system

Controls for:● temperature● air distribution l, M and K● fan speed Z● demisting and defrosting V

A/C : cooling4 : air recirculationÜ : heated rear window

Heated rear window Ü 3 43.Heated exterior mirrors Ü 3 40.Heated seats ß 3 54.Ventilated seats A 3 54.

Heated steering wheel A 3 92.

Cooling A/C

Press A/C to switch on cooling. TheLED in the button illuminates toindicate activation. Cooling is onlyfunctional when the engine is runningand climate control fan is switched on.Press A/C again to switch off cooling.The air conditioning system cools anddehumidifies (dries) as soon as theoutside temperature is slightly abovethe freezing point. Thereforecondensation may form and drip fromunder the vehicle.

Climate control 149

If no cooling or drying is required,switch off the cooling system for fuelsaving reasons.Activated cooling may inhibitAutostops. Stop-start system 3 163.

Air recirculation system 4

Press 4 to activate air recirculationmode. The LED in the buttonilluminates to indicate activation.Press 4 again to deactivate airrecirculation mode.

9 Warning

The exchange of fresh air isreduced in air recirculation mode.In operation without cooling the airhumidity increases, so thewindows may mist up from inside.The quality of the passengercompartment air deteriorates,which may cause the vehicleoccupants to feel drowsy.

In warm and very humid ambient airconditions, the windscreen may mistup from outside when cold air isdirected towards it. If windscreenmists up from outside, activatewindscreen wiper and deactivate l.

Maximum cooling

Briefly open the windows so that hotair can disperse quickly.● Switch on cooling A/C.● Air circulation system 4 on.● Press air distribution switch M.● Set temperature control to

coldest level.● Set fan speed to highest level.● Open all vents.

150 Climate control

Demisting and defrosting thewindows V


● Set fan speed to highest level.● Set temperature control to

warmest level.● Switch on heated rear window Ü.● Open side air vents as required


NoteIf V is pressed while the engine isrunning, an Autostop will be inhibiteduntil V is pressed again.If l is pressed with the fan switchedon and the engine running, anAutostop will be inhibited until l ispressed again or until the fan isswitched off.If V is pressed while the engine isin an Autostop, the engine will restartautomatically.If l is pressed with the fan switchedon while the engine is in anAutostop, the engine will restartautomatically.

Stop-start system 3 163.

Electronic climate controlsystemThe dual zone climate control allowsdifferent temperatures for driver sideand front passenger side.In automatic mode, temperature, fanspeed and air distribution areregulated automatically.

Controls for:● temperature on driver side● air distribution l M K● fan speed Z● temperature on front passenger

side● system on or off ON/OFF● cooling A/C● automatic mode AUTO● manual air recirculation 4● demisting and defrosting V● dual zone temperature

synchronisation SYNCHeated rear window Ü 3 43.

Climate control 151

Heated exterior mirrors Ü 3 40.Heated seats ß 3 54.Ventilated seats A 3 54.Heated steering wheel A 3 92.

Each change of settings is shown inthe Info-Display for a few seconds.The electronic climate control systemis only fully operational when theengine is running.

Automatic mode AUTO

Basic setting for maximum comfort:● Press AUTO, the air distribution

and fan speed are regulatedautomatically.

● Open all air vents to allowoptimised air distribution inautomatic mode.

● Press A/C to switch on optimalcooling and demisting. The LEDin the button illuminates toindicate activation.

● Set the preselectedtemperatures for driver and frontpassenger using the left and rightrotary knob. Recommendedtemperature is 22 °C.

The fan speed regulation in automaticmode can be changed in the Settingsmenu.Vehicle personalisation 3 125.

Temperature preselection

152 Climate control

Set temperatures to the desiredvalue. The knob on the passengerside changes the temperature for thepassenger side.The knob on thedriver's side changes the temperaturefor the driver's side or for both sidesdepending on activation ofsynchronisation SYNC.The selected temperature is indicatedin the display of the knob.If the minimum temperature Lo is set,the climate control system runs atmaximum cooling, if cooling A/C isswitched on.If the maximum temperature Hi is set,the climate control system runs atmaximum heating.NoteIf A/C is switched on, reducing theset cabin temperature can cause theengine to restart from an Autostop orinhibit an Autostop.


Dual zone temperaturesynchronisation SYNCPress SYNC to link passenger sidetemperature setting to the driver side.The LED in the button illuminates toindicate activation.When passenger side settings will beadjusted, synchronisation isdeactivated and the LEDextinguishes.

Demisting and defrosting thewindows V

● Press V. The LED in the buttonilluminates to indicate activation.

● Temperature and air distributionare set automatically and the fanruns at high speed.

● Switch on heated rear window Ü.● To return to previous mode:

press V, to return to automaticmode: press AUTO.

Settings of automatic rear windowheating can be changed in theSettings menu in the Info-Display.Vehicle personalisation 3 125.NoteIf V is pressed while the engine isrunning, an Autostop will be inhibiteduntil V is pressed again.If l is pressed with the fan switchedon and the engine running, anAutostop will be inhibited until l ispressed again or until the fan isswitched off.

Climate control 153

If V is pressed while the engine isin an Autostop, the engine will restartautomatically.If l is pressed with the fan switchedon while the engine is in anAutostop, the engine will restartautomatically.


System on or off ON/OFFCooling, fan and automatic mode canbe switched off by pressing ON/OFF.When the system is deactivated, theLED in the button ON/OFF is off.Activation by pressing ON/OFF, A/Cor AUTO. The LED in the buttonilluminates to indicate activation.

Manual settingsClimate control system settings canbe changed by activating the buttonsand rotary knobs as described below.Changing a setting will deactivate theautomatic mode.

Fan speed Z

Press left button to decrease or rightbutton to increase fan speed. The fanspeed is indicated by the number ofLEDs in the button.Pressing the left button for longer: fanand cooling are switched off.Pressing the right button for longer:the fan runs at maximum speed.To return to automatic mode: PressAUTO.

Air distribution l, M, K

Press the appropriate button for thedesired adjustment. The LED in thebutton illuminates to indicateactivation.l : to windscreen and front door

windows (air conditioning isactivated in the background tohelp preventing windows fromfogging)

M : to head area via adjustable airvents

K : to foot well and windscreen

All combinations are possible.Return to automatic air distribution:press AUTO.

154 Climate control

Cooling A/C

Press A/C to switch on cooling. TheLED in the button illuminates toindicate activation. Cooling is onlyfunctional when the engine is runningand climate control fan is switched on.Press A/C again to switch off cooling.The air conditioning system cools anddehumidifies (dries) when outsidetemperature is above a specific level.Therefore condensation may formand drip from under the vehicle.If no cooling or drying is required,switch off the cooling system for fuelsaving reasons.

When the cooling system is switchedoff, no engine restart will berequested by the climate controlsystem during an Autostop.Exception: defrost system is activatedand outside temperature above 0 °Crequests a restart.Stop-start system 3 163.The display will indicate A/C ON whencooling is activated or A/C OFF whenthe cooling is deactivated.

Manual air recirculation 4

Press 4 to activate the airrecirculation mode. The LED in thebutton illuminates to indicateactivation.

Press 4 again to deactivaterecirculation mode.

9 Warning

The exchange of fresh air isreduced in air recirculation mode.In operation without cooling the airhumidity increases, so thewindows may mist up from inside.The quality of the passengercompartment air deteriorates,which may cause the vehicleoccupants to feel drowsy.

In warm and very humid ambient airconditions, the windscreen may mistup from outside, when cold air isdirected towards it. If windscreenmists up from outside, activatewindscreen wiper and deactivate l.

Automatic air recirculationAn air humidity sensor switchesautomatically to external air if internalair humidity is too high.

Climate control 155

Basic settingsSome settings can be changed in theSettings menu in the Info-Display.Vehicle personalisation 3 125.

Auxiliary heaterAir heaterQuickheat is an electric auxiliary airheater which automatically warms upthe passenger compartment morequickly.

Air ventsAdjustable air ventsAt least one air vent must be openwhile cooling is on.

To open the vent, turn the adjusterwheel towards the bigger W symbol.Adjust the air amount at the ventoutlet by turning the adjuster wheel.

Direct the flow of air by tilting andswivelling the slats.To close the vent, turn the adjusterwheel towards the smaller W symbol.

9 Warning

Do not attach any objects to theslats of the air vents. Risk ofdamage and injury in case of anaccident.

Fixed air ventsAdditional air vents are locatedbeneath the windscreen and doorwindows and in the foot wells.

156 Climate control

MaintenanceAir intake

The air intake in front of thewindscreen in the enginecompartment must be kept clear toallow air intake. Remove any leaves,dirt or snow.

Pollen filterThe pollen filter cleans dust, soot,pollen and spores from the airentering the vehicle through the airintake.

Air conditioning regularoperationIn order to ensure continuouslyefficient performance, cooling mustbe operated for a few minutes once amonth, irrespective of the weatherand time of year. Operation withcooling is not possible when theoutside temperature is too low.

ServiceFor optimal cooling performance, it isrecommended to annually check theclimate control system, startingthree years after initial vehicleregistration, including:● functionality and pressure test● heating functionality● leakage check● check of drive belts● cleaning of condenser and

evaporator drainage● performance check

Driving and operating 157

Driving andoperating

Driving hints ............................... 158Control of the vehicle ............... 158Steering ................................... 158

Starting and operating ............... 158New vehicle running-in ............ 158Ignition switch positions ........... 158Power button ........................... 159Retained power off .................. 160Starting the engine .................. 161Overrun cut-off ........................ 163Stop-start system .................... 163Parking .................................... 166

Engine exhaust .......................... 168Diesel particle filter .................. 168Catalytic converter ................... 169

Automatic transmission .............. 169Transmission display ............... 169Selector lever .......................... 170Manual mode ........................... 171Electronic driving programmes 171Fault ........................................ 171Interruption of power supply .... 172

Manual transmission .................. 173

Manual transmission automa‐ted .............................................. 173

Transmission display ............... 174Selector lever .......................... 174Manual mode ........................... 175Electronic driving programmes 176Fault ........................................ 176

Brakes ........................................ 176Antilock brake system ............. 176Parking brake .......................... 177Brake assist ............................. 179Hill start assist ......................... 179

Ride control systems ................. 179Traction Control system .......... 179Electronic Stability Control ...... 180Sport mode .............................. 182

Driver assistance systems ......... 182Cruise control .......................... 182Speed limiter ........................... 184Adaptive cruise control ............ 186Forward collision alert ............. 193Following distance indication ... 196Active emergency braking ....... 197Parking assist .......................... 200Side blind spot alert ................. 207Rear view camera ................... 209Traffic sign assistant ................ 211Lane keep assist ..................... 215

Fuel ............................................ 217Fuel for petrol engines ............. 217Fuel for diesel engines ............ 218Fuel for natural gas operation . 219Refuelling ................................ 219Fuel consumption - CO2-Emissions ............................... 221

Trailer hitch ................................ 222General information ................. 222Driving characteristics andtowing tips .............................. 222

Trailer towing ........................... 223Towing equipment ................... 223Trailer stability assist ............... 226

158 Driving and operating

Driving hintsControl of the vehicleNever coast with engine notrunningMany systems will not function in thissituation (e.g. brake servo unit, powersteering). Driving in this manner is adanger to yourself and others.All systems function during anAutostop.Stop-start system 3 163.

Idle boostIf charging of the vehicle battery isrequired due to battery condition, thepower output of the generator mustbe increased. This will be achieved byan idle boost which may be audible.A message appears in the DriverInformation Centre.

PedalsTo ensure the pedal travel isuninhibited, there must be no mats inthe area of the pedals.

Use only floor mats, which fit properlyand are fixed by the retainers on thedriver side.

SteeringIf power steering assist is lostbecause the engine stops or due to asystem malfunction, the vehicle canbe steered but may require increasedeffort.

Starting and operatingNew vehicle running-inDo not brake unnecessarily hard forthe first few journeys.During the first drive, smoke mayoccur because of wax and oilevaporating off the exhaust system.Park the vehicle in the open for awhile after the first drive and avoidinhaling the fumes.During the running-in period, fuel andengine oil consumption may behigher.Additionally, the cleaning process ofthe diesel particle filter may takeplace more often.Diesel particle filter 3 168.Autostop may be inhibited to allow forcharging of the vehicle battery.

Ignition switch positionsTurn key:


0 : ignition off: Some functionsremain active until key isremoved or driver's door isopened, provided the ignition wason previously

1 : accessory power mode: Steeringwheel lock released, someelectrical functions are operable,ignition is off

2 : ignition on power mode: Ignitionis on, diesel engine is preheating.Control indicators illuminate andmost electrical functions areoperable

3 : engine start: Release key afterstarting procedure begins

Steering wheel lockRemove key from ignition switch andturn steering wheel until it engages.

9 Danger

Never remove the key fromignition switch during driving asthis will cause steering wheel lock.

Power button

Electronic key must be inside thevehicle.

Accessory power modePress Engine Start/Stop once withoutoperating clutch or brake pedal. Theyellow LED in the button illuminates.Steering wheel lock is released andsome electrical functions areoperable, ignition is off.Ignition on power modePress and hold Engine Start/Stop forsix seconds without operating clutchor brake pedal. The green LED in thebutton illuminates, diesel engine ispreheating. Control indicatorsilluminate and most electricalfunctions are operable.Engine startOperate clutch pedal (manualtransmission) or brake pedal(automatic transmission or manualtransmission automated) and pressEngine Start/Stop once more.Release button after startingprocedure begins.Ignition offPress Engine Start/Stop briefly ineach mode or when engine is runningand vehicle is stationary. Some


functions remain active until driver'sdoor is opened, provided the ignitionwas on previously.Emergency shut off during drivingPress Engine Start/Stop for longerthan two seconds or press twicebriefly within five seconds 3 161.

Steering wheel lockThe steering wheel lock activatesautomatically when:● The vehicle is stationary.● The ignition has been switched

off.● The driver's door is opened.

To release steering wheel lock, openand close driver's door and switch onaccessory mode or start the enginedirectly.

9 Warning

If the vehicle battery is discharged,the vehicle must not be towed,tow-started or jump-started as thesteering wheel lock cannot bedisengaged.

Operation on vehicles withelectronic key system in case offailureIf either the electronic key fails or thebattery of the electronic key is weak,the Driver Information Centre maydisplay No Remote Detected orReplace Battery in Remote Key whenyou try to start the vehicle.Place the electronic key solelycentred in the transmitter area inlongitudinal direction flat with buttonsupside as shown in the illustration.

Other objects, e.g. other keys,transponder, tags, coins etc. must beremoved from the centre console.

Depress the clutch pedal (manualtransmission) or the brake pedal(automatic transmission or manualtransmission automated) and pressEngine Start/Stop.To switch off the engine, pressEngine Start/Stop again. Remove theelectronic key from the centreconsole.This option is intended foremergencies only. Replace theelectronic key battery as soon aspossible 3 22.For unlocking or locking the doors,see fault in radio remote control unitor electronic key system 3 24.

Retained power offThe following electronic systems canwork until the driver's door is openedor for ten minutes after the ignition isswitched off:● power windows● sunroof● power outlets


Starting the engineVehicles with ignition switch

Turn key to position 1 to release thesteering wheel lock.Manual transmission: operate clutchand brake pedal.Automatic transmission: operatebrake pedal and move selector leverto P or N.Manual transmission automated:operate brake pedal.Do not operate accelerator pedal.

Diesel engines: turn the key toposition 2 for preheating and wait untilcontrol indicator ! extinguishes.Turn key briefly to position 3 andrelease: an automatic procedureoperates the starter with a short delayuntil the engine is running, seeAutomatic Starter Control.Manual transmission: during anAutostop, the engine can be startedby depressing the clutch pedal3 163.Automatic transmission or manualtransmission automated: during anAutostop, the engine can be startedby releasing the brake pedal 3 163.

Vehicles with power button

Manual transmission: operate clutchand brake pedal.Automatic transmission: operatebrake pedal and move selector leverto P or N.Manual transmission automated:operate brake pedal.Do not operate accelerator pedal.Press and release Engine Start/Stop:an automatic procedure operates thestarter with a short delay until theengine is running, see automaticstarter control.


Before restarting or to switch off theengine when vehicle is stationary,press Engine Start/Stop once morebriefly.Manual transmission: during anAutostop, the engine can be startedby depressing the clutch pedal3 163.Automatic transmission or manualtransmission automated: during anAutostop, the engine can be startedby releasing the brake pedal 3 163.

Emergency shut off during drivingIf the engine needs to be switched offduring driving in case of emergency,press Engine Start/Stop for longerthan two seconds or press twicebriefly within five seconds.

9 Danger

Switching off the engine duringdriving may cause loss of powersupport for brake and steeringsystems. Assistance systems andairbag systems are disabled.Lighting and brake lights will

extinguish. Therefore power downthe engine and ignition whiledriving only when required in caseof emergency.

Starting the vehicle at lowtemperaturesStarting the engine without additionalheaters is possible down to -25 °С fordiesel engines and -30 °C for petrolengines. Required is an engine oilwith the correct viscosity, the correctfuel, performed services and asufficiently charged vehicle battery.With temperatures below -30 °C theautomatic transmission requires awarming phase of approx.five minutes. The selector lever mustbe in position P.

Automatic starter controlThis function controls the enginestarting procedure. The driver doesnot need to hold the key in position 3or to hold Engine Start/Stop pressed.Once applied, the system will go onstarting automatically until the engine

is running. Because of the checkingprocedure, the engine starts runningafter a short delay.Possible reasons for a non-startingengine:● Clutch pedal not operated

(manual transmission).● Brake pedal not operated or

selector lever not in P or N(automatic transmission).

● Brake pedal not operated(manual transmissionautomated).

● Timeout occurred.

Turbo engine warm-upUpon start-up, engine availabletorque may be limited for a short time,especially when the enginetemperature is cold. The limitation isto allow the lubrication system to fullyprotect the engine.


Overrun cut-offThe fuel supply is automatically cut offduring overrun, i.e. when the vehicleis driven with a gear engaged butaccelerator pedal is released.Depending on driving conditions, theoverrun cut-off may be deactivated.

Stop-start systemThe stop-start system helps to savefuel and to reduce the exhaustemissions. When conditions allow, itswitches off the engine as soon as thevehicle is at a low speed or at astandstill, e.g. at a traffic light or in atraffic jam. The ignition stays on.The engine switches on automaticallywhen certain conditions apply orrestart is activated by a driver.

ActivationThe stop-start system is available assoon as the engine is started, thevehicle starts-off and the conditionsas stated below in this section arefulfilled.

Deactivation

Deactivate the stop-start systemmanually by pressing D. Thedeactivation is indicated when theLED in the button illuminates.

AutostopVehicles with manual transmissionDepending on the engine, twoversions of an Autostop are available.See engine data to identify the engineidentifier code for your vehicle3 285.Conventional AutostopAll engines except B16DTU have onlythe conventional Autostop.

An Autostop can be activated at aspeed lower than 5 km/h.Activate a conventional Autostop asfollows:● Depress the clutch pedal.● Set the lever in neutral.● Release the clutch pedal.

Early AutostopOnly the engine B16DTU has earlyAutostop in addition to conventionalAutostop.An Autostop can be activated at aspeed lower than 14 km/h.Early Autostop is inhibited if theincline is greater than 5%.Activate an early Autostop as follows:● Depress the brake pedal

sufficiently.● Depress the clutch pedal.

The engine will be switched off whilethe ignition stays on.Early Autostop is inhibited when theturn signal is on, trailer hitch isconnected, the steering wheel ismoved beyond a certain point or theinclines is greater than 5%.


Vehicles with automatic transmissionor manual transmission automatedIf the vehicle is at a standstill withdepressed brake pedal, Autostop isactivated automatically.

Indication

An Autostop is indicated by theneedle at the AUTOSTOP position inthe tachometer.After restart, the idle speed isindicated.During an Autostop the performanceof the vehicle will be maintained.

Conditions for an AutostopThe stop-start system checks if eachof the following conditions is fulfilled.● The stop-start system is not

manually deactivated.● The bonnet is fully closed.● The driver's door is closed or the

driver's seat belt is fastened.● The vehicle battery is sufficiently

charged and in good condition.● The engine is warmed up.● The engine coolant temperature

is not too high.● The engine exhaust temperature

is not too high, e.g. after drivingwith high engine load.

● The ambient temperature isabove -5 °C.

● The brake vacuum is sufficient.● Between the last Restart and a

new Autostop must be about10 s.

● The self-cleaning function of thediesel particle filter is not active.

● The vehicle was driven at least atwalking speed since the lastAutostop.

● The stop-start system will bedeactivated on inclines of 15% ormore.

Otherwise an Autostop will beinhibited.Certain settings of the climate controlsystem may inhibit an Autostop. SeeClimate control chapter for moredetails 3 148.Immediately after motorway drivingan Autostop may be inhibited.New vehicle running-in 3 158.

Vehicle battery discharge protectionTo ensure reliable engine restarts,several vehicle battery dischargeprotection features are implementedas part of the stop-start system.

Power saving measuresDuring an Autostop, several electricalfeatures such as auxiliary electricheater or rear window heating aredisabled or switched to a power


saving mode. The fan speed of theclimate control system is reduced tosave power.

Restart of the engine by the driverVehicles with manual transmissionDepending on the engine, twoversions of a restart are available.See engine data to identify the engineidentifier code for your vehicle3 285.Conventional restartDepress the clutch pedal to restart theengine. For engines with late restart,this is only possible withoutdepressing the brake pedal.Late restartAll petrol engines and the dieselengines B16DTU and B16DTR havelate restart in addition to conventionalrestart. Late restart is only active oninclines up to 5%.● Depress the brake pedal.● Depress the clutch pedal.● Select first gear.● Release the brake pedal to

restart the engine.

Vehicles with automatic transmissionor manual transmission automated:Release the brake pedal or moveselector lever out of D into N or P torestart the engine.

Restart of the engine by the stop-start systemOn vehicles with manual transmissionwhich are in a conventional Autostop,the selector lever must be in neutralto enable an automatic restart.On vehicles with manual transmissionwhich are in an early Autostop, anautomatic restart is possible, whennot in neutral if the brake pedal andthe clutch pedal are depressed.On vehicles with automatictransmission or manual transmissionautomated, the selector lever must bein D to enable an automatic restart.The engine will be restartedautomatically by the stop-startsystem, if one of the followingconditions occurs during an Autostop:● The stop-start system is

manually deactivated.● The bonnet is opened.

● The driver's seat belt isunfastened and / or the driver'sdoor is opened.

● The engine temperature is toolow.

● The charging level of the vehiclebattery is below a defined level.

● The brake vacuum is notsufficient.

● The vehicle is driven at least atwalking speed.

● The climate control systemrequests an engine start.

● The desired compartmenttemperature does not match theactual temperature.

● The air conditioning is manuallyswitched on.

If the bonnet is not fully closed, awarning message is displayed in theDriver Information Centre.If an electrical accessory, e.g. aportable CD player, is connected tothe power outlet, a brief power dropduring the restart might be noticeable.


NoteIf a trailer or a bike carrier isattached, early Autostop and laterestart is deactivated.

Parking

9 Warning

● Do not park the vehicle on aneasily ignitable surface. Thehigh temperature of theexhaust system could ignite thesurface.

● Always apply the parkingbrake. Activate the manualparking brake without pressingthe release button. Apply asfirmly as possible on a downhillslope or uphill slope. Depressbrake pedal at the same time toreduce operating force.For vehicles with electricparking brake, pull switch m fora minimum of one second untilcontrol indicator m illuminatesconstantly and electric parkingbrake is applied 3 111.

● Switch off the engine.● If the vehicle is on a level

surface or uphill slope, engagefirst gear or set the selectorlever to position P beforeremoving the ignition key orswitching off ignition onvehicles with power button. Onan uphill slope, turn the frontwheels away from the kerb.If the vehicle is on a downhillslope, engage reverse gear orset the selector lever to positionP before removing the ignitionkey or switching off ignition onvehicles with power button.Turn the front wheels towardsthe kerb.

● Close the windows and thesunroof.

● Remove the ignition key fromthe ignition switch or switch offignition on vehicles with powerbutton. Turn the steering wheeluntil the steering wheel lock isfelt to engage.

For vehicles with automatictransmission, the key can onlybe removed when the selectorlever is in position P.For vehicles with manualtransmission automated, thekey can only be removed fromthe ignition switch when theparking brake is applied.

● Lock the vehicle.● Activate the anti-theft alarm

system.● The engine cooling fans may run

after the engine has beenswitched off 3 229.

Caution

After running at high enginespeeds or with high engine loads,operate the engine briefly at a lowload or run in neutral forapprox. 30 seconds beforeswitching off, in order to protectthe turbocharger.


NoteIn the event of an accident withairbag deployment, the engine isswitched off automatically if thevehicle comes to a standstill within acertain time.

Emergency operation underextreme cold temperatures

9 Warning

This emergency operation mayonly be carried out in case ofextremely cold temperatures and ifthe vehicle is parked on a levelsurface.

In countries with extreme coldtemperatures it may be necessary topark the vehicle without appliedparking brake.This is an emergency operation toavoid freezing of the parking brake.

Vehicles equipped with manualtransmission automated, electricparking brake and power buttonOn vehicles with manual transmissionautomated the ignition can only beswitched off if the parking brake isapplied. Therefore the following itemsmust be carried out to release theelectric parking brake:1. Apply electric parking brake and

switch off ignition.2. Switch on ignition by pressing and

holding Engine Start/Stop for sixseconds without operating brakepedal.

3. Press brake pedal and releaseelectric parking brake.

4. Switch off ignition.

Vehicles equipped with manualtransmission automated, electricparking brake and ignition switchOn vehicles with manual transmissionautomated the ignition can only beswitched off if the parking brake isapplied. Therefore the following itemsmust be carried out to release theelectric parking brake:

1. Apply electric parking brake andswitch off ignition.

2. Press brake pedal and releaseelectric parking brake.

3. Remove key from ignition switch.


Engine exhaust

9 Danger

Engine exhaust gases containpoisonous carbon monoxide,which is colourless and odourlessand could be fatal if inhaled.If exhaust gases enter the interiorof the vehicle, open the windows.Have the cause of the faultrectified by a workshop.Avoid driving with an open loadcompartment, otherwise exhaustgases could enter the vehicle.

Diesel particle filterAutomatic cleaning processThe diesel particle filter system filtersharmful soot particles out of theexhaust gases. The system includesa self-cleaning function that runsautomatically during driving withoutany notification. The filter is cleanedby periodically burning off the sootparticles at high temperature. Thisprocess takes place automaticallyunder set driving conditions and maytake up to 25 minutes. Typically itneeds between seven and twelveminutes. Autostop is not availableand fuel consumption may be higherduring this period. The emission ofsmells and smoke during this processis normal.

System requires cleaningUnder certain driving conditions, e.g.driving short distances, the systemcannot clean itself automatically.If cleaning of the filter is required andif previous driving conditions did notenable automatic cleaning, it will be

indicated by illumination of % and awarning message in the DriverInformation Centre.% illuminates along with a warningmessage illuminates when dieselparticle filter is full. Start cleaningprocess as soon as possible.% flashes along with a warningmessage when diesel particle filterhas reached the maximum fillinglevel. Start cleaning processimmediately to avoid damage to theengine.

Activate self-cleaning processTo activate cleaning process,continue driving, keep engine speedabove 2000 rpm. Shift down ifnecessary. Diesel particle filtercleaning is then started.Cleaning takes place quickest at highengine speeds and loads.Control indicator % extinguishes assoon as the self-cleaning operation iscomplete. Keep on driving until self-cleaning operation is complete.


Caution

If possible, do not interruptcleaning process. Drive untilcleaning is completed to avoid theneed for service or repair by aworkshop.

Cleaning process not possibleIf cleaning is not possible for anyreasons, control indicatorZilluminates and a warning messageappears in the Driver InformationCentre. Engine power may bereduced. Seek the assistance of aworkshop immediately.

Catalytic converterThe catalytic converter reduces theamount of harmful substances in theexhaust gases.

Caution

Fuel grades other than those listedon pages 3 217, 3 285 coulddamage the catalytic converter orelectronic components.Unburnt petrol will overheat anddamage the catalytic converter.Therefore avoid excessive use ofthe starter, running the fuel tankdry and starting the engine bypushing or towing.

In the event of misfiring, unevenengine running, a reduction in engineperformance or other unusualproblems, have the cause of the faultrectified by a workshop as soon aspossible. In an emergency, drivingcan be continued for a short period,keeping vehicle speed and enginespeed low.

Automatic transmissionThe automatic transmission permitsautomatic gearshifting (automaticmode) or manual gearshifting(manual mode).Manual shifting is possible in manualmode by tapping the selector lever to+ or - 3 171.

Transmission display

The mode or selected gear is shownin the Driver Information Centre.In automatic mode, the drivingprogramme is indicated by D.


In manual mode, M and the numberof the selected gear is indicated.R indicates reverse gear.N indicates neutral position.P indicates park position.

Selector lever

P : park position, wheels are locked,engage only when the vehicle isstationary and the parking brakeis applied

R : reverse gear, engage only whenthe vehicle is stationary

N : neutralD : automatic modeM : manual mode

< : upshift in manual mode] : downshift in manual mode

The selector lever is locked in P andcan only be moved when the ignitionis on, the release button on theselector lever is pushed and the brakepedal is applied.Without brake pedal applied, controlindicator j illuminates.If the selector lever is not in P whenthe ignition is switched off, controlindicator j flashes.To engage P or R, press the releasebutton.

The engine can only be started withthe lever in position P or N. Whenposition N is selected, press the brakepedal or apply the parking brakebefore starting.Do not accelerate while engaging agear. Never depress the acceleratorpedal and brake pedal at the sametime.When a gear is engaged, the vehicleslowly begins to creep when thebrake is released.

Engine brakingTo utilise the engine braking effect,select a lower gear in good time whendriving downhill, see manual mode.

Rocking the vehicleRocking the vehicle is onlypermissible if the vehicle is stuck insand, mud or snow. Move the selectorlever between D and R in a repeatpattern. Do not race the engine andavoid sudden acceleration.


ParkingApply the parking brake and engageP.The ignition key can only be removedwhen the selector lever is in positionP.

Manual mode

Move selector lever out of position Dtowards the left in position M.Tap selector lever upwards + to shiftto a higher gear.Tap the selector lever downwards - toshift to a lower gear.

If a higher gear is selected whenvehicle speed is too low, or a lowergear when vehicle speed is too high,the shift is not executed. This cancause a message in the DriverInformation Centre.In manual mode, no automaticshifting to a higher gear takes placeat high engine revolutions.

Gear shift indicationThe symbol R or S with a numberbeside it is indicated whengearshifting is recommended for fuelsaving reasons.Shift indication appears only inmanual mode.

Electronic drivingprogrammes● Following a cold start, the

operating temperatureprogramme increases enginespeed to quickly bring thecatalytic converter to the requiredtemperature.

● Special programmesautomatically adapt the shiftingpoints when driving up inclines ordown hills.

● In snowy or icy conditions or onother slippery surfaces, theelectronic transmission controlenables the driver to selectmanually first, second or thirdgear for starting off.

KickdownPressing down the accelerator pedalbeyond the kickdown detent will leadto maximum accelerationindependent of selected drivingmode. The transmission shifts to alower gear depending on enginespeed.

FaultIn the event of a fault a message isdisplayed in the Driver InformationCentre. Vehicle messages 3 123.Electronic transmission controlenables only fourth gear. Thetransmission no longer shiftsautomatically.



Interruption of power supplyIn the event of an interruption ofpower supply, the selector levercannot be moved out of the Pposition. The ignition key cannot beremoved from the ignition switch.If the vehicle battery is discharged,start the vehicle using jump leads3 269.If the vehicle battery is not the causeof the fault, release the selector lever.1. Apply the parking brake.

2. Release the selector lever trimfrom the centre console. Pokewith a finger into the leathersocket below the selector leverand push the trim upwards.Rotate trim to the left.

3. Insert a small stick (e.g. a pen orscrew driver) into the openingnear the selector lever. Pushdown the the stick vertically andmove the selector lever out of P. Ifthis position is engaged again, theselector lever will be locked again.

Have the cause of the powersupply interruption remedied by aworkshop.

4. Mount the selector lever trim ontothe centre console and refit.


Manual transmission

To engage reverse, depress theclutch pedal and then press therelease button on the selector leverand engage the gear.If the gear does not engage, set thelever to neutral, release the clutchpedal and depress again; then repeatgear selection.Do not slip the clutch unnecessarily.When operating, depress the clutchpedal completely. Do not use thepedal as a foot rest.

When clutch slip is detected for aspecific time, the engine power will bereduced. A warning is displayed in theDriver Information Centre. Releasethe clutch.

Caution

It is not advisable to drive with thehand resting on the selector lever.

Gear shift indication 3 112.Stop-start system 3 163.

Manual transmissionautomatedThe automated manual transmissionpermits manual gearshifting (manualmode) or automatic gearshifting(automatic mode), both withautomatic clutch control.Manual shifting is possible by tappingthe selector lever in manual mode.NoteWhen unlocking or opening avehicle door, a sound may beaudible caused by the hydraulicsystem.


Transmission display

In automatic mode, the drivingprogramme is indicated by D in theDriver Information Centre.In manual mode, M and the numberof the selected gear is indicated.R indicates reverse gear.N indicates neutral.

Selector lever

Always move the selector lever in theappropriate direction as far as it willgo. Upon release, it automaticallyreturns to the centre position.NoteDo not hold the selector lever in anintermediate position. Not fullyengaging a gear may lead tomalfunction and an error messagemay be displayed in the DriverInformation Centre.

Return the selector lever to thecentre position. After a short while Nwill be displayed in the DriverInformation Centre and the systemwill operate normally again.

N : neutral positionD/M : switch between automatic (D)

and manual (M) shift mode.The transmission displayshows either D or M with theselected gear

< : upshifting in manual mode] : downshifting in manual modeR : reverse gear. Engage only

when vehicle is stationary

If selector lever is moved from R to theleft, D is directly engaged.If selector lever is moved from D to +or -, manual mode M is selected andthe transmission shifts.

Starting offDepress the brake pedal and movethe selector lever to D/M or R. If D isselected, transmission is in automaticmode and first gear is engaged. If Ris selected, reverse gear is engaged.


The vehicle starts to move when thebrake pedal is released.To start-off without depressing thebrake pedal, accelerate immediatelyafter engaging a gear as long as D orR flashes.If neither the accelerator nor thebrake pedal are depressed, no gearis engaged and D or R flashes for abrief time in the display.

Stopping the vehicleIn D, first gear is engaged and theclutch is released when the vehicle isstopped. In R, reverse gear remainsengaged.

Engine braking

Automatic modeWhen driving downhill, the manualtransmission automated does notshift into higher gears until a fairlyhigh engine speed has been reached.It shifts down in good time whenbraking.

Manual modeTo utilise the engine braking effect,select a lower gear in good time whendriving downhill. Changing intomanual mode is only possible whilethe engine is running or during anAutostop.

Rocking the vehicleRocking the vehicle is onlypermissible if the vehicle is stuck insand, mud or snow. Move the selectorlever between R and D in a repeatpattern. Do not race the engine andavoid sudden acceleration.

ParkingThe most recently engaged gear (seetransmission display) remainsengaged when switching off ignition.With N, no gear is engaged.Therefore always apply the parkingbrake when switching off ignition. Ifparking brake is not applied, P flashesin the transmission display and thekey cannot be removed from theignition switch. P stops flashing in thetransmission display as soon as theparking brake is slightly applied.

When the ignition is switched off, thetransmission no longer responds tomovement of the selector lever.Emergency operation to avoidfreezing of the parking brake 3 166.

Manual modeIf a higher gear is selected when theengine speed is too low, or a lowergear when the speed is too high, theshift is not executed. This preventsthe engine from running at too low ortoo high an engine speed. A warningmessage is displayed in the DriverInformation Centre. Vehiclemessages 3 123.If engine speed is too low, thetransmission automatically shifts to alower gear.When + or - is selected in automaticmode, the transmission switches tomanual mode and shifts accordingly.

Gear shift indicationThe symbol R or S with a numberbeside is indicated when gearshiftingis recommended for fuel savingreasons.


Shift indication appears only inmanual mode.

Electronic drivingprogrammes● Following a cold start, the

operating temperatureprogramme increases enginespeed to quickly bring thecatalytic converter to the requiredtemperature.

● The adaptive programme tailorsgearshifting to the drivingconditions, e.g. greater load orgradients.

KickdownIf the accelerator pedal is presseddown completely in automatic mode,the transmission shifts to a lower geardepending on engine speed.

FaultTo prevent damage to the manualtransmission automated, the clutch isengaged automatically at high clutchtemperatures.

In the event of a fault, a warningmessage is displayed in the DriverInformation Centre. Vehiclemessages 3 123.Continued driving is restricted or notpossible, depending on the fault.Have the cause of the fault remediedby a workshop.

BrakesThe brake system comprises twoindependent brake circuits.If a brake circuit fails, the vehicle canstill be braked using the other brakecircuit. However, braking effect isachieved only when the brake pedalis depressed firmly. Considerablymore force is needed for this. Thebraking distance is extended. Seekthe assistance of a workshop beforecontinuing the journey.When the engine is not running, thesupport of the brake servo unitdisappears once the brake pedal hasbeen depressed once or twice.Braking effect is not reduced, butbraking requires significantly greaterforce. It is especially important to bearthis in mind when being towed.Control indicator R 3 111.

Antilock brake systemAntilock brake system (ABS)prevents the wheels from locking.


ABS starts to regulate brake pressureas soon as a wheel shows a tendencyto lock. The vehicle remainssteerable, even during hard braking.ABS control is made apparentthrough a pulse in the brake pedaland the noise of the regulationprocess.For optimum braking, keep the brakepedal fully depressed throughout thebraking process, despite the fact thatthe pedal is pulsating. Do not reducethe pressure on the pedal.After starting off, the system performsa self-test which may be audible.

Control indicator u 3 112.

Adaptive brake lightDuring full braking, all three brakelights flash for the duration of ABScontrol.

Fault

9 Warning

If there is a fault in the ABS, thewheels may be liable to lock dueto braking that is heavier thannormal. The advantages of ABSare no longer available. Duringhard braking, the vehicle can nolonger be steered and mayswerve.


Parking brake

9 Warning

Before leaving the vehicle, checkparking brake status. Controlindicator R (manual parkingbrake) or m (electrical parkingbrake) must illuminate constantly.

Manual parking brake

9 Warning

Always apply parking brake firmlywithout operating the releasebutton, and apply as firmly aspossible on a downhill or uphillslope.To release the parking brake, pullthe lever up slightly, press therelease button and fully lower thelever.


To reduce the operating forces ofthe parking brake, depress thefoot brake at the same time.

Control indicator R 3 111.

Electric parking brake

Applying when vehicle is stationary

9 Warning

Pull switch m for a minimum ofone second until control indicatorm illuminates constantly andelectric parking brake is applied

3 111. The electric parking brakeoperates automatically withadequate force.Before leaving the vehicle, checkthe electric parking brake status.Control indicator m 3 111.

The electric parking brake can alwaysbe activated, even if the ignition is off.Do not operate electric parking brakesystem too often without enginerunning as this will discharge thevehicle battery.

ReleasingSwitch on ignition. Keep foot brakepedal depressed and then pushswitch m.

Drive away functionVehicles with manual transmission:Depressing the clutch pedal and thenslightly releasing the clutch pedal andslightly depressing the acceleratorpedal releases the electric parkingbrake automatically. This is notpossible when switch m is pulled atthe same time.

Vehicles with automatic transmissionor manual transmission automated:Engaging D and then depressing theaccelerator pedal releases theelectric parking brake automatically.This is not possible when switch m ispulled at the same time.

Dynamic braking when vehicle ismovingWhen the vehicle is moving and theswitch m is kept pulled, the electricparking brake system will deceleratethe vehicle, but will not applystatically.As soon as the switch m is released,dynamic braking will be stopped.

Automatic applyingIf the vehicle is equipped withautomatic transmission and adaptivecruise control is active, electricparking brake is applied automaticallywhen vehicle is stopped by thesystem for more than two minutes.Parking brake releases automaticallyafter moving off.


Functionality checkWhen the vehicle is not moving, theelectric parking brake might beapplied automatically. This is done tocheck the system.

FaultFailure mode of electric parking brakeis indicated by a control indicator jand by a vehicle message which isdisplayed in the Driver InformationCentre. Vehicle messages 3 123.Apply electric parking brake: pull andhold the switch m for more thanfive seconds. If control indicator milluminates, electric parking brake isapplied.Release electric parking brake: pushand hold the switch m for more thantwo seconds. If control indicator mextinguishes, electric parking brake isreleased.Control indicator m flashes: electricparking brake is not fully applied orreleased. When continuouslyflashing, release electric parkingbrake and retry applying.

Brake assistIf brake pedal is depressed quicklyand forcefully, maximum brake forceis automatically applied.Operation of brake assist mightbecome apparent by a pulse in thebrake pedal and a greater resistancewhen depressing the brake pedal.Maintain steady pressure on thebrake pedal as long as full braking isrequired. Maximum brake force isautomatically reduced when brakepedal is released.

Hill start assistThe system helps prevent unintendedmovement when driving away oninclines.When releasing the brake pedal afterstopping on an incline, brakes remainon for further two seconds. Thebrakes release automatically as soonas the vehicle begins to accelerate.

Ride control systemsTraction Control systemThe Traction Control system (TC) is acomponent of the Electronic StabilityControl (ESC).TC improves driving stability whennecessary, regardless of the type ofroad surface or tyre grip, bypreventing the drive wheels fromspinning.As soon as the drive wheels starts tospin, engine output is reduced andthe wheel spinning the most is brakedindividually. This considerablyimproves the driving stability of thevehicle on slippery road surfaces.

TC is operational after each enginestart as soon as the control indicatorb extinguishes.When TC operates b flashes.


9 Warning

Do not let this special safetyfeature tempt you into taking riskswhen driving.Adapt speed to the roadconditions.

Control indicator b 3 112.

Deactivation

TC can be switched off when spinningof drive wheels is required: press bbriefly.

Control indicator k illuminates.A status message appears in theDriver Information Centre when TC isdeactivated.When TC is deactivated, ESCremains active but with higher controlthreshold.TC is reactivated by pressing bagain. A status message pops up inthe Driver Information Centre whenTC is reactivated.TC is also reactivated the next timethe ignition is switched on.

FaultIf there is a fault in the system thecontrol indicator b illuminatescontinuously and a message appearsin the Driver Information Centre. Thesystem is not operational.


Electronic Stability ControlElectronic Stability Control (ESC)improves driving stability whennecessary, regardless of the type ofroad surface or tyre grip.As soon as the vehicle starts toswerve (understeer/oversteer),engine output is reduced and thewheels are braked individually.ESC operates in combination with theTraction Control system (TC). Itprevents the drive wheels fromspinning.Torque distribution is a specialfeature that allocates the torque to thedrive wheels before the ESCintervenes. When cornering, thewheels on the inner curve are brakedindividually. Additionally, enginetorque will be delivered to the drivewheel on the outer curve. Thisreduces the tendency ofundersteering and improves tractionwhen cornering fast.


ESC is operational after each enginestart as soon as the control indicatorb extinguishes.When ESC operates b flashes.

9 Warning

Do not let this special safetyfeature tempt you into taking riskswhen driving.Adapt speed to the roadconditions.

Control indicator b 3 112.

Deactivation

ESC and TC can be deactivated:● hold b pressed for a minimum of

five seconds: ESC and TC areboth deactivated. k and nilluminate and status messagesappear in the Driver InformationCentre.

● To deactivate only Tractioncontrol system press button bbriefly: TC is inactive but ESCremains active, k illuminates. Astatus message appears in theDriver Information Centre whenTC is deactivated.

ESC is reactivated by pressing theb button again. If the TC system waspreviously disabled, both TC andESC are reactivated. k and nextinguishes when TC and ESC arereactivated.ESC is also reactivated the next timethe ignition is switched on.

FaultIf there is a fault in the system thecontrol indicator b illuminatescontinuously and a message appearsin the Driver Information Centre. Thesystem is not operational.



Sport modeSport mode adapts the settings ofsome vehicle systems to a sportierdriving style.

Activation

Press SPORT when engine isrunning.LED in the button illuminates whensport mode is active and a statusmessage appears in the DriverInformation Centre.

DeactivationBriefly press SPORT. Sport mode isdeactivated the next time the ignitionis switched on.

Driver assistancesystems

9 Warning

Driver assistance systems aredeveloped to support the driverand not to replace the driver'sattention.The driver accepts fullresponsibility when driving thevehicle.When using driver assistancesystems, always take careregarding the current trafficsituation.

Cruise controlThe cruise control can store andmaintain speeds of approx. 30 km/hto maximum vehicle speed.Deviations from the stored speedsmay occur when driving uphill ordownhill.Activating in first gear is not possible.


Do not use the cruise control if it is notadvisable to maintain a constantspeed.

Illustrations show different versions.

Control indicator m 3 114.

Switching on

Press m; control indicator m ininstrument cluster illuminates white.

Activation

Accelerate to the desired speed andturn thumb wheel to SET/-, thecurrent speed is stored andmaintained. Control indicator m ininstrument cluster illuminates green.On Uplevel display m illuminatesgreen and set speed is indicated.Accelerator pedal can be released.

Vehicle speed can be increased bydepressing the accelerator pedal.When the accelerator pedal isreleased, the previously stored speedis resumed.Cruise control remains activatedwhile gearshifting.

Increase speedWith cruise control active, hold thumbwheel turned to RES/+ or briefly turnto RES/+ repeatedly: speedincreases continuously or in smallincrements.Alternatively accelerate to the desiredspeed and store by turning to SET/-.


Reduce speedWith cruise control active, hold thumbwheel turned to SET/- or briefly turn toSET/- repeatedly: speed decreasescontinuously or in small increments.

DeactivationPress y; control indicator m ininstrument cluster illuminates white.On Uplevel display m changes towhite.Cruise control is deactivated, but notswitched off. Last stored speedremains in memory for later speedresume.Automatic deactivation:● Vehicle speed is below approx.

30 km/h.● Vehicle speed drops more than

25 km/h below the set speed.● The brake pedal is depressed.● The clutch pedal is depressed for

a few seconds.● The selector lever is in N.● Engine speed is in a very low

range.

● The Traction Control system orElectronic Stability Control isoperating.

● Parking brake is applied.● Simultaneous pressing RES/+

and brake pedal deactivatescruise control and will deletestored speed.

Resume stored speedTurn thumb wheel to RES/+ at aspeed above 30 km/h. The storedspeed will be obtained.

Switching offPress m, control indicator m ininstrument cluster extinguishes. Thestored speed is deleted.Pressing L to activate the speedlimiter or switching off the ignition alsoswitches off cruise control anddeletes the stored speed.

Speed limiterThe speed limiter prevents thevehicle exceeding a preset maximumspeed.

The maximum speed can be set atspeeds above 25 km/h up to200 km/h.The driver can only accelerate up tothe preset speed. Deviations from thelimited speed may occur when drivingdownhill.The preset speed limit is displayed inthe Driver Information Centre whenthe system is active.

Activation



Press L, symbol L illuminates in theDriver Information Centre.If cruise control has been activatedbefore, it is switched off when speedlimiter is activated and the controlindicator m extinguishes.

Set speed limitAccelerate to the desired speed andbriefly turn thumb wheel to SET/-: thecurrent speed is stored as maximumspeed.On Midlevel display L and the speedlimit is displayed.

On Uplevel display L changes togreen.

Change speed limitWith speed limiter active, hold orbriefly turn thumb wheel to RES/+ toincrease or SET/- to decrease thedesired maximum speed.

Exceeding the speed limitWhen exceeding the limited speedwithout driver input, the speed willflash in the Driver Information Centreand a chime sounds during thisperiod.In the event of an emergency, it ispossible to exceed the speed limit bydepressing the accelerator pedalfirmly nearly to the final point. In thiscase no chime appears.

Release the accelerator pedal andthe speed limiter function isreactivated once a speed lower thanthe limit speed is obtained.

DeactivationPress y: speed limiter is deactivatedand the vehicle can be driven withoutspeed limit.

On Midlevel display the stored limitedspeed is indicated in brackets.On Uplevel display L changes towhite.Additionally, a correspondingmessage appears.Speed limiter is deactivated, but notswitched off. Last stored speedremains in memory for later speedresume.


Resume limit speedTurn thumb wheel to RES/+. Thestored speed limit will be obtainedand is indicated without brackets inthe Driver Information Centre.

Switching offPress L, the speed limit indicationextinguishes in the Driver InformationCentre. The stored speed is deleted.By pressing m to activate cruisecontrol or adaptive cruise control,speed limiter is also deactivated andthe stored speed is deleted.By switching off the ignition, speedlimiter is also deactivated, but thespeed limit will be stored for nextspeed limiter activation.

Adaptive cruise controlAdaptive cruise control is anenhancement to conventional cruisecontrol with the additional feature ofmaintaining a certain distance behindthe vehicle ahead.

Adaptive cruise control automaticallydecelerates the vehicle whenapproaching a slower moving vehicle.It then adjusts the vehicle speed tofollow the vehicle ahead at theselected following distance. Thevehicle speed increases or decreasesto follow the vehicle in front, but willnot exceed the set speed. It mayapply limited braking with activatedbrake lights.The adaptive cruise control can storeset speed over 30 km/h for manualtransmission. On vehicles withautomatic transmissions the systemcan brake until a full stop and drive offfrom a stop.

Adaptive cruise control uses radarand camera sensors to detect thevehicles ahead. If no vehicle isdetected in the driving path, theadaptive cruise control will behavelike a conventional cruise control.

Adaptive cruise control is mainlyadvised to be used on long straightroads like highways or country roadswith steady traffic. Do not use thesystem if it is not advisable tomaintain a constant speed.Control indicator A 3 115, m 3 114,C 3 114.

9 Warning

The complete driver attention isalways required while driving withadaptive cruise control. The driverstays fully in control of the vehiclebecause the brake pedal, theaccelerator pedal and the cancelswitch have priority over anyadaptive cruise control operation.


Switching on


Press C to switch on adaptive cruisecontrol. C appears in the DriverInformation Centre.

Activation by setting the speedAdaptive cruise control can beactivated at speeds above 25 km/h onvehicles with automatic transmissionor 30 km/h on vehicles with manualtransmission. The upper speed limit is180 km/h.Accelerate to the desired speed andturn thumb wheel to SET/-, thecurrent speed is stored andmaintained.

The adaptive cruise control symbolC, the following distance setting andset speed are indicated in the DriverInformation Centre.The accelerator pedal can bereleased. Adaptive cruise controlremains activated while gearshifting.

Overriding set speedIt is always possible to drive fasterthan the selected set speed bydepressing the accelerator pedal.When the accelerator pedal isreleased, the vehicle returns to thedesired distance if a slower vehicle isahead. Otherwise it returns to thestored speed.Once the system is activated,adaptive cruise control decelerates orbrakes if it detects a vehicle ahead,which is slower or closer than thedesired following distance.

9 Warning

Accelerating by the driverdeactivates automatic braking bythe system. This is indicated as apop-up warning in the DriverInformation Centre.


Increase speedWith adaptive cruise control active,hold RES/+ to increase speedcontinuously. Push RES/+ repeatedlyto increase speed in smallincrements.

Reduce speedWith adaptive cruise control active,hold SET/- to decrease speedcontinuously. Push SET/- repeatedlyto decrease speed in smallincrements.

Resume stored speedIf the system is switched on butinactive, then turn thumb wheel toRES/+ at a speed above 25 km/h toresume the stored speed.

Full speed range adaptive cruisecontrol on vehicles with automatictransmissionFull speed range adaptive cruisecontrol will maintain a followingheadway behind a detected vehicleand slow your vehicle to a stop behindthat vehicle.

In case of a brief stop of the vehicleahead the adaptive cruise control willdrive off automatically without driveraction. If necessary, press RES/+ orthe accelerator pedal to resumeadaptive cruise control.If the stopped vehicle ahead wasstopped for a longer time and thenbegins to move forward, the greenilluminated vehicle ahead controlindicator A will flash and a warningchime will sound as a reminder tocheck traffic before proceeding.When the vehicle ahead drives away,press RES/+ or the accelerator pedalto resume adaptive cruise control. Ifstopped for more than five minutes orif the driver door is opened and thedriver safety belt is unbuckled, theelectric parking brake is appliedautomatically to hold the vehicle.Control indicator m will illuminate. Torelease electric parking brake, pressthe accelerator pedal. Electric parkingbrake 3 177

9 Warning

When full speed range adaptivecruise control is deactivated orcancelled, the vehicle will nolonger be held at a stop and canstart to move. Always be preparedto manually apply the brake to holdthe vehicle stationary.Do not leave the vehicle while it isbeing held at a stop by the fullspeed range adaptive cruisecontrol. Always move selectorlever to park position P and switchoff the ignition before leaving thevehicle.

Setting the following distanceWhen adaptive cruise control detectsa slower moving vehicle in the drivingpath, it will adjust the vehicle speed tomaintain the following distanceselected by the driver.The following distance can be set tonear, medium or far.


Press E, the current setting is shownin the Driver Information Centre.Press E again to change thefollowing distance. The setting is alsodisplayed in the Driver InformationCentre.

The selected following distance isindicated by filled distance bars in theadaptive cruise control page.Note that the following distancesetting is shared with the sensitivitysetting of forward collision alert3 193.Example: If setting 3 (far) is selected,then the driver is warned soonerbefore a possible collision, also ifadaptive cruise control is inactive orswitched off.

9 Warning

The driver accepts fullresponsibility for the appropriatefollowing distance based on traffic,weather and visibility conditions.Following distance must beadjusted or the system switchedoff when required by the prevailingconditions.

Detecting the vehicle ahead

The green illuminated vehicle aheadcontrol indicator A is displayed whenthe system detects a vehicle in thedriving path. The range of the sensorsis between 25 and 150 metresdepending on vehicle speed.Forward collision alert 3 193.


If this symbol does not display, ordisplays briefly, adaptive cruisecontrol will not respond to vehiclesahead.

DeactivationAdaptive cruise control is deactivatedby the driver when:● y is pressed.● Brake pedal is applied.● Clutch pedal is depressed for

more than four seconds.● Selector lever of automatic

transmission is moved to N.The system is also automaticallydeactivated when:● Vehicle speed accelerates above

190 km/h or slows down below55 km/h (on vehicles withautomatic transmission it slowsdown to a stop withoutdeactivating within five minutes).

● The Traction Control system isdeactivated or operating.

● The Electronic Stability Control isdeactivated or operating.

● There is no traffic and nothingdetected on the road sides forapprox. one minute. In this casethere are no radar echoes andthe sensor may report that it isblocked.

● The active emergency brakingsystem is applying the brakes.

● Driving on steep inclines.● The radar sensor is blocked by

an ice or water film.● A fault is detected in the radar,

camera, engine or brake system.● The brakes are too hot.

Additionally, the system isautomatically deactivated on vehicleswith automatic transmission (fullspeed range adaptive cruise control)when:● The electric parking brake is

applied.● The vehicle is being held to a stop

by the system for more thanfive minutes.

● The vehicle stops, the driver'sseat belt is unbuckled and thedriver's door is opened.

When adaptive cruise control isdeactivated, the control indicator mchanges from green to white and apop-up message is displayed in theDriver Information Centre.The stored speed is maintained.

On Midlevel display, the stored speedis indicated in brackets in the DriverInformation Centre when the systemis deactivated but not switched off.On Uplevel display, the adaptivecruise control symbol C changesfrom green to white when the systemis deactivated but not switched off.

9 Warning

When adaptive cruise control isdeactivated, the driver must takeover full brake and engine control.


Switching offPress C to switch off adaptive cruisecontrol. C in the Driver InformationCentre extinguishes. The storedspeed is deleted.Switching off the ignition alsoswitches off adaptive cruise controland deletes the stored speed.

Driver's attention● Use adaptive cruise control

carefully on bends or mountainroads, as it can lose the vehicleahead and needs time to detect itagain.

● Do not use the system onslippery roads as it can createrapid changes in tyre traction(wheel spinning), so that youcould lose control of the vehicle.

● Do not use adaptive cruisecontrol during rain, snow orheavy dirt, as the radar sensorcan be covered by a water film,dust, ice or snow. This reduces orsuppresses completely the

visibility. In case of sensorblockage, clean the sensorcover.

System limits● The system's automatic brake

force does not permit hardbraking and the braking levelmay not be sufficient to avoid acollision.

● After a sudden lane change, thesystem needs a certain time todetect the next precedingvehicle. So if a new vehicle isdetected, the system mayaccelerate instead of braking.

● Adaptive cruise control doesignore the oncoming traffic.

● Adaptive cruise control does notconsider pedestrians andanimals for braking and drivingoff.

● Adaptive cruise control considersstopped vehicles only at lowspeed.

● Do not use adaptive cruisecontrol when towing a trailer.

● Do not use adaptive cruisecontrol on roads with an incline ofmore than 10%.

Bends

The adaptive cruise control calculatesa predicted path based on thecentrifugal force. This predicted pathconsiders the current bendcharacteristic, but cannot consider afuture bend change. The system maylose the current vehicle ahead orconsider a vehicle which is not in theactual lane. This can happen whenentering or exiting a bend or if thebend gets stronger or weaker. If it nolonger detects any vehicle ahead,then control indicator A willextinguish.


If the centrifugal force is too high in abend, the system slows down thevehicle slightly. This braking level isnot designed to avoid spinning-off thebend. The driver is responsible forreducing the selected speed beforeentering a bend and in general toadapt the speed to the road type andto existing speed limits.

MotorwaysOn motorways, adapt the set speedto the situation and the weather.Always consider that adaptive cruisecontrol has a limited visibility range, alimited braking level and a certainreaction time to verify if a vehicle is onthe driving path or not. Adaptivecruise control may not be able tobrake the vehicle in time to avoid acollision with a much slower vehicle orafter a lane change. This is

particularly true while driving fast or ifthe visibility is reduced due to weatherconditions.While entering or exiting a motorway,adaptive cruise control may lose thevehicle ahead and accelerate up tothe set speed. For this reason,decrease the set speed before theexit or before the entry.

Vehicle path changes

If another vehicle enters your drivingpath, adaptive cruise control will firstconsider the vehicle when it iscompletely in your path. Be ready totake action and depress the brakepedal, if you need to brake morequickly.

Hill and trailer considerations

9 Warning

Do not use adaptive cruise controlon steep hill roads.

System performance on hills dependson vehicle speed, vehicle load, trafficconditions and the road gradient. Itmay not detect a vehicle in your pathwhile driving on hills. On steep hills,you may have to use the acceleratorpedal to maintain your vehicle speed.When going downhill you may have tobrake to maintain or reduce yourspeed.Note that applying the brakedeactivates the system.


Radar unit

The radar unit is mounted behind theradiator grille behind or below thebrand emblem.

9 Warning

The radar unit was alignedcarefully during manufacture.Therefore, after a frontal accident,do not use the system. The frontbumper may appear to be intact,however the sensor behind can beout of position and reactincorrectly. After an accident,

consult a workshop to verify andcorrect the adaptive cruise controlsensor position.

SettingsSettings can be changed in thevehicle personalisation menu in theColour-Info-Display.Select the relevant setting in Settings,I Vehicle in the Colour-Info-Display.Info-Display 3 121.Vehicle personalisation 3 125.

FaultIf the adaptive cruise control does notwork due to temporary conditions(e.g. blockage by ice, overheatedbrakes or low speed manoeuvres) orif there is a permanent system error,then a message is displayed in theDriver Information Centre.Vehicle messages 3 123.

Forward collision alertThe forward collision alert may help toavoid or reduce the harm caused byfront-end crashes.

If the vehicle is equipped withconventional cruise control, theforward collision alert uses the frontcamera in the windscreen to detect avehicle directly ahead, in your path.If the vehicle is equipped withadaptive cruise control, the forwardcollision alert uses the radar sensor todetect a vehicle directly ahead, inyour path.

A vehicle ahead is indicated by thecontrol indicator A.If a vehicle directly ahead isapproached too quickly, a warningchime and alert in the DriverInformation Centre is provided.Additionally the driver gets notified bya flashing red LED stripe which isprojected on the windscreen in thedriver's field of view.


A precondition is that forward collisionalert with front camera system is notdeactivated by pressing V on thesteering wheel or, with radar sensor,that it is not deactivated in the vehiclepersonalisation menu 3 125.

ActivationForward collision alert with frontcamera detects vehicles to distancesof approximately 60 metres andoperates automatically at all speedsabove walking speed.Forward collision alert with radarsensor detects vehicles to distancesof approximately 150 metres andoperates automatically at all speedsabove walking speed.

Alerting the driverThe vehicle ahead control indicatorA illuminates green in the instrumentcluster when the system has detecteda vehicle in the driving path.The control indicator A changes toyellow when the distance to apreceding moving vehicle gets toosmall or when approaching anothervehicle too rapidly.

Caution

The colour lighting of this controlindicator does not correspond tolocal traffic laws on followingdistance. The driver bears fullresponsibility for maintaining safefollowing distance according toapplicable traffic rules, weatherand road conditions etc. at alltimes.

When the time to a potential collisionwith a vehicle in front gets too smalland a collision is imminent, thecollision alert symbol pops-up in theDriver Information Centre and thedriver gets notified by a flashing redLED stripe which is projected on thewindscreen in the driver's field ofview.

Simultaneously a warning chimesounds. Depress the brake pedal andsteer the vehicle, if it is required by thesituation.

Selecting the alert sensitivityPress V or E to set the alertsensitivity to near, medium or far andon some versions off.


The first button press shows thecurrent setting on the DriverInformation Centre. Additional buttonpresses will change this setting. Thechosen setting will remain until it ischanged. The alert timing will varybased on vehicle speed. The fasterthe vehicle speed, the farther awaythe alert will occur. Consider trafficand weather conditions whenselecting the alert timing.

Note that the alert timing sensitivitysetting is shared with the followingdistance setting of the adaptive cruisecontrol. So changing the alert timingsensitivity changes the adaptivecruise control following distancesetting.

DeactivationThe system can be deactivated.On forward collision alert with radarsensor the system can be disabled bythe personalisation menu, 3 125.

On forward collision alert with frontcamera press V repeatedly untilForward Collision Alert Off appears inthe Driver Information Centre.If the forward collision alert wasdeactivated, alert sensitivity is set to"medium" when ignition is switchedon next time.The last selected setting will be storedwhen the ignition is switched off.

General information

9 Warning

Forward collision alert is just awarning system and does notapply the brakes. Whenapproaching a vehicle ahead toorapidly, it may not provide youenough time to avoid a collision.The driver accepts fullresponsibility for the appropriatefollowing distance based on traffic,weather and visibility conditions.


The complete attention of thedriver is always required whiledriving. The driver must always beready to take action and apply thebrakes.

System limitationsForward collision alert is designed towarn on vehicles only, but may reactalso to other objects.In the following cases, forwardcollision alert may not detect a vehicleahead or sensor performance islimited:● on winding roads● when weather limits visibility,

such as fog, rain, or snow● when the sensor is blocked by

snow, ice, slush, mud, dirt,windscreen damage or affectedby foreign items, e.g. stickers

Following distanceindicationThe following distance indicationdisplays the distance to a precedingmoving vehicle. The front camera in

the windscreen is used to detect thedistance of a vehicle directly ahead inthe vehicle's path. It is active atspeeds above 40 km/h.When a preceding vehicle is detectedahead, the distance is indicated inseconds, displayed on a page in theDriver Information Centre.On Midlevel display, choose InfoMenu ? via MENU on the turnsignal lever and turn the adjusterwheel to choose following distanceindication page,3 115

On Uplevel display, select Info menuvia steering wheel buttons and presso to select following distanceindication 3 115.The minimum indicated distance is0.5 seconds.If there is no vehicle ahead or thevehicle ahead is out of range, twodashes will be displayed: -.- sec.

If Adaptive cruise control is active,this page shows the alert sensitivitysetting instead of following distancesetting. 3 186.


Active emergency brakingActive emergency braking can help toreduce the damage and injury fromcrashes with vehicles and obstaclesdirectly ahead, when a collision canno longer be avoided either bymanual braking or by steering. Beforethe active emergency brakingapplies, the driver is warned by theforward collision alert 3 193.The feature uses various inputs (e.g.camera sensor, radar sensor, brakepressure, vehicle speed) to calculatethe probability of a frontal collision.

9 Warning

This system is not intended toreplace the driver responsibility fordriving the vehicle and lookingahead. Its function is limited tosupplemental use only to reducethe vehicle speed before acollision.

The system may not react forpedestrians or animals. After asudden lane change, the systemneeds a certain time to detect thenext preceding vehicle.The driver shall always be ready totake action and apply the brakesand steer to avoid collisions.

FunctionalityIf equipped only with front camera theactive emergency braking operates inforward gear above walking speed upto 85 km/h.With radar sensor active emergencybraking operates in forward gearabove walking speed at all speeds.A precondition is that forward collisionalert with front camera system is notdeactivated by pressing V on thesteering wheel 3 193or, with radarsensor, that it is not deactivated in thevehicle personalisation menu 3 125.The system includes:● brake preparation system● emergency automatic braking

● forward looking brake assist● intelligent brake assist (only with

radar sensor)

Brake preparation systemWhen approaching a vehicle aheadso quickly that a collision is likely, thebrake preparation system slightlypressurizes the brakes. This reducesthe response time, when a manual orautomatic braking is requested.The brake system is prepared so thatbraking can occur more rapidly.If equipped only with front camera thesystem operates up to a speed of 80km/h.

Emergency automatic brakingAfter activation of brake preparationsystem and just before the imminentcollision, this function automaticallyapplies limited braking to reduce theimpact speed of the collision orprohibit a crash. Depending on thesituation, the vehicle mayautomatically brake moderately orhard. This front automatic braking can


only occur if a vehicle ahead isdetected, indicated by the vehicleahead indicator A 3 193.If equipped only with front camera thesystem operates up to a speed of 60km/h.Below a speed of 40 km/h the systemcan apply full braking.Emergency automatic braking mayslow the vehicle to a complete stop totry to avoid a potential crash. If thishappens, emergency automaticbraking may engage the electricparking brake to hold the vehicle at astop. To release press the electricparking brake button or firmly pressthe accelerator pedal.

9 Warning

Emergency automatic braking isan emergency crash preparationfeature and is not designed toavoid crashes. Do not rely on thesystem to brake the vehicle.Emergency automatic braking willnot brake outside of its operatingspeed range and only responds todetected vehicles.

Forward looking brake assistIn addition to the brake preparationsystem and emergency automaticbraking, the forward looking brakeassist function makes the brake assistmore sensitive. Therefore, pressingthe brake pedal less strongly resultsin immediate hard braking. Thisfunction helps the driver brakequicker and harder before theimminent collision.If equipped only with front camera thesystem operates up to a speed of 85km/h.

9 Warning

Active emergency braking is notdesigned to apply hardautonomous braking or toautomatically avoid a collision. It isdesigned to reduce the vehiclespeed before a collision. It may notreact for pedestrians or animals.After a sudden lane change, thesystem needs a certain time todetect the next preceding vehicle.

The complete attention of thedriver is always required whiledriving. The driver shall always beready to take action and apply thebrakes and steer to avoidcollisions. The system is designedto work with all occupants wearingtheir seat belts.

Intelligent Brake AssistIf the vehicle is equipped with radarsensor Intelligent brake assist mayactivate when the brake pedal isapplied quickly by providing a boostto braking based on the speed ofapproach and distance to a vehicleahead.Minor brake pedal pulsations or pedalmovement during this time is normaland the brake pedal should continueto be applied as needed. Intelligentbrake assist will automaticallydisengage only when the brake pedalis released.


9 Warning

Intelligent brake assist mayincrease vehicle braking insituations when it may not benecessary. You could block theflow of traffic. If this occurs, takeyour foot off the brake pedal andthen apply the brakes as needed.

Deactivation

On vehicles with front camera activeemergency braking can bedeactivated by repeatedly pressingthe gap switch V to Off setting,

3 193. If deactivated a message isdisplayed in the Driver InformationCentre.On vehicles with radar sensor thesystem can be disabled in thepersonalisation menu in the Info-display, 3 125.

System limitationsIn some cases, the active emergencybraking system may provide anautomatic braking in situations thatseem to be unnecessary, for instancein parking garages, due to traffic signsin a curve or due to vehicles inanother lane. This is normaloperation, the vehicle does not needservice. Firmly apply the acceleratorpedal to override the automaticbraking.

Emergency automatic braking maynot:● detect a vehicle ahead on

winding or hilly roads.● detect all vehicles, especially

vehicles with a trailer, tractors,muddy vehicles, etc.

● detect a vehicle when weatherlimits visibility, such as in fog,rain, or snow.

To avoid malfunction keep the areasof the camera sensor in thewindscreen and the radar sensor inthe radiator grille always clean fromdirt, dust, ice and snow.Complete attention is always requiredwhile driving, and you should beready to take action and apply thebrakes and/or steer the vehicle toavoid crashes.

FaultIn case the system requires a service,a message is displayed in the DriverInformation Centre.


If the system does not work as itshould do, vehicle messages aredisplayed in the Driver InformationCentre.Vehicle messages 3 123.

Parking assistGeneral informationWhen the trailer hitch is attached,change the configuration settings inthe vehicle personalisation menu inthe Info-Display. Vehiclepersonalisation 3 125.When attaching a trailer or bikecarrier to the trailer hitch, the parkingassist is deactivated.

Rear parking assist

9 Warning

It is the driver who bears fullresponsibility for the parkingmanoeuvre.Always check the surroundingarea while reversing and using therear parking assist system.

The rear parking assist makesparking easier by measuring thedistance between the vehicle andrear obstacles. It informs and warnsthe driver by giving acoustic signalsand display indication.

The system has four ultrasonicparking sensors in the rear bumper.

ActivationAfter ignition is switched on, the rearparking assist is activated.An illuminated LED in the parkingassist button r indicates that thesystem is ready to operate.

IndicationThe system warns the driver withacoustic signals against potentiallyhazardous obstacles behind thevehicle in a distance range up to50 cm while a forward gear isengaged, or up to 1.5 metres whilereverse gear is engaged.Depending on which side of thevehicle is closer to an obstacle, youwill hear acoustic warning signals inthe vehicle on the respective side.The interval between the soundsbecomes shorter as the vehicle getscloser to that obstacle. When thedistance is less than approx. 30 cm,the sound is continuous.Additionally, the distance to rearobstacles is displayed by changingdistance lines in the DriverInformation Centre 3 115.The distance indication can beinhibited by vehicle messages with ahigher priority. After dismissing themessage distance indication appearsagain.


Deactivation

Press parking assist button r todeactivate, the LED in the buttonextinguishes.

FaultIn the event of a fault or if the systemdoes not work temporarily, e.g.because of high external noise levelor other interference factors, the LEDin the button flashes forthree seconds and then extinguishes.A message is indicated in the DriverInformation Centre.

Front-rear parking assist

9 Warning

The driver bears full responsibilityfor the parking manoeuvre.Always check the surroundingarea when driving backwards orforwards while using parkingassist system.

The front-rear parking assistmeasures the distance between thevehicle and obstacles in front andbehind the vehicle. It informs andwarns the driver by giving acousticsignals and display indication.It uses two different acoustic warningsignals for the front and rearmonitoring areas, each with adifferent tone frequency.

The system has four ultrasonicparking sensors each in the rear andfront bumper.

ActivationThe system is activated automaticallyat a speed up to 11 km/h.


An illuminated LED in the parkingassist button r indicates that thesystem is ready to operate.If r is switched off within an ignitioncycle, the front parking assist isdeactivated. If vehicle speed hasexceeded 25 km/h beforehand,parking assist will be reactivatedwhen speed drops below 11 km/h.When the system is deactivated, theLED in the button extinguishes andPark Assist Off pops-up in the DriverInformation Centre.

IndicationThe system warns the driver withacoustic signals against potentiallyhazardous obstacles in front of thevehicle in a distance range up to80 cm and against potentiallyhazardous obstacles behind thevehicle in a distance range up to50 cm while a forward gear isengaged, or up to 1.5 m while reversegear is engaged.Depending on which side of thevehicle is closer to an obstacle, youwill hear acoustic warning signals inthe vehicle on the respective side.The interval between the soundsbecomes shorter as the vehicle getscloser to that obstacle. When thedistance is less than approx. 30 cm,the sound is continuous.Additionally, the distance to rear andfront obstacles is displayed bychanging distance lines in the DriverInformation Centre 3 115 or,depending on the version, on the Info-Display 3 121.

The distance indication can beinhibited by vehicle messages with ahigher priority. After dismissing themessage distance indication appearsagain.

DeactivationThe system is deactivatedautomatically when vehicle speedexceeds 11 km/h.Manual deactivation is also possibleby pressing the parking assist buttonr.


When the system is deactivatedmanually, the LED in the buttonextinguishes and Park Assist Offpops-up in the Driver InformationCentre.After a manual deactivation, the front-rear parking assist is activated againif r is pressed or if reverse gear isengaged.The complete system can bemanually deactivated in the vehiclepersonalisation menu in theInfo-Display. It remains deactivatedduring the ignition cycle or untilactivation in personalisation menuagain. Vehicle personalisation 3 125.

FaultIn the event of a fault or if the systemdoes not work temporarily, e.g.because of high external noise levelor other interference factors, amessage pops-up in the DriverInformation Centre.Vehicle messages 3 123.

Advanced parking assist

9 Warning

The driver bears full responsibilityfor accepting the parking slotsuggested by the system and theparking manoeuvre.Always check the surroundingarea in all directions when usingthe advanced parking assist.

The advanced parking assistmeasures a suitable parking slotwhile passing, calculates thetrajectory and automatically steersthe vehicle into a parallel orperpendicular parking slot.Instructions are given in the DriverInformation Centre 3 115 or,depending on the version, on the Info-Display 3 121, supported by acousticsignals.The driver must control acceleration,braking and gear shifting, whilesteering is done automatically.

Advanced parking assist is alwayscombined with front-rear parkingassist. Both systems use the samesensors in the front and rear bumper.The system has six ultrasonic parkingsensors each in both the rear andfront bumper.

Activation of advanced parking assistAdvanced parking assist can only beactivated when driving forwards.


When searching for a parking slot, thesystem is ready to operate with ashort press of (.The system recognises andmemorises ten metres for parallelparking slots or six metres forperpendicular parking slots in theparking assist mode.The system can only be activated ata speed up to 30 km/h and the systemsearches for a parking slot at a speedup to 30 km/h.The maximum allowed paralleldistance between the vehicle and arow of parked cars is 1.8 metres forparallel parking and 2.5 metres forperpendicular parking.

FunctionalityParking slot searching mode,indication in the Driver InformationCentre

Select parallel or perpendicularparking slot in Driver InformationCentre by long press on (.The system is configured to detectparking slots by default on thepassenger side. To detect parkingslots on the driver side, switch on turnsignal indicator on the driver side.

When a slot is detected, a visualfeedback in the Driver InformationCentre and an acoustic signal isgiven.


Indication in the Colour-Info-Display

Select parallel or perpendicularparking slot by tapping the respectiveicon on the display.Select parking side by tapping therespective icon on the display.

When a slot is detected, a visualfeedback on the Colour-Info-Displayand an acoustic signal is given.If the driver does not stop the vehicleafter a parking slot is proposed, thesystem starts to search for anothersuitable parking slot.Park guiding modeThe parking slot suggestion of thesystem is accepted when the vehicleis stopped by the driver within tenmetres for parallel parking slots orsix metres for perpendicular parkingslots after the Stop message is given.The system calculates the optimalpath into the parking slot.

A brief vibration in the steering wheelafter engaging reverse gear indicatesthat the steering is controlled by thesystem. Then the vehicle is steeredinto the slot automatically by givingthe driver detailed instructions forbraking, accelerating and gearshifting. The driver must keep handsaway from the steering wheel.Always pay attention to the sound ofthe front-rear parking assist.Continuous sound indicates that thedistance to an obstacle is less thanapprox. 30 cm.If, for any reason, the driver must takeover control of the steering, hold thesteering wheel only at the outer edge.Automatic steering is cancelled in thisevent.Display indicationThe instructions on the display show:● General hints and warning

messages.● A hint when driving faster than

30 km/h during parking slotsearching mode.

● The demand to stop the vehicle,when a parking slot is detected.


● The direction of driving during theparking manoeuvre.

● The demand to shift into reverseor first gear.

● The demand to stop or to driveslowly.

● For some of the instructions aprogress bar is shown in theDriver Information Centre.

● The successful completion of theparking manoeuvre indicated bya pop-up symbol and a chime.

● The cancelling of a parkingmanoeuvre.

Display prioritiesAdvanced parking assist indication inthe Driver Information Centre can beinhibited by vehicle messages with ahigher priority. After approving themessage by pressing SET/CLR onthe turn signal lever or 9 on thesteering wheel, advanced parkingassist instructions appear again andthe parking manoeuvre can becontinued.

DeactivationThe system is deactivated by:● a short press of (● parking manoeuvre successfully

ended● driving faster than 30 km/h during

parking slot search● driving faster than 8 km/h during

parking guidance● driver interference on steering

wheel detected● exceeding number of maximum

gear changes: eight cycles whenparallel parking or five cycleswhen perpendicular parking

● switching off the ignitionDeactivation by the driver or by thesystem during manoeuvring will beindicated by Parking Deactivated onthe display. Additionally, an acousticsignal sounds.

FaultA message appears when:● There is a fault in the system.● The driver did not successfully

complete the parkingmanoeuvre.

● The system is not operational.● Any of the deactivation reasons

described above apply.If an object is detected during parkinginstructions, Stop is indicated on thedisplay. Removing the object willresume the parking manoeuvre. If theobject is not removed, the system willbe deactivated. A long press of ( willactivate the system and search for anew parking slot.

Basic notes on parking assistsystems

9 Warning

Under certain circumstances,various reflective surfaces onobjects or clothing as well as


external noise sources may causethe system to fail to detectobstacles.Special attention must be paid tolow obstacles which can damagethe lower part of the bumper.

Caution

Performance of the system can bereduced when sensors arecovered, e.g. by ice or snow.Performance of the parking assistsystem can be reduced due toheavy loading.Special conditions apply if thereare taller vehicles in the vicinity(e.g. off-road vehicles, mini vans,vans). Object identification andcorrect distance indication in theupper part of these vehiclescannot be guaranteed.Objects with a very small reflectioncross-section, e.g. objects ofnarrow size or soft materials, maynot be detected by the system.

Parking assist systems do notdetect objects outside thedetection range.

NoteIt is possible that the sensor detectsa non-existing object caused byecho disturbance from externalacoustic noise or mechanicalmisalignments (sporadic falsewarnings may occur).Make sure that the front numberplate is properly mounted (not bentand no gaps to the bumper on the leftor right side) and the sensors arefirmly in place.Advanced parking assist systemmay not respond to changes in theavailable parking space afterinitiating a parking manoeuvre. Thesystem may recognize an entry, agateway, a courtyard or even acrossing as a parking slot. Afterselecting reverse gear the system

will start a parking manoeuvre. Takecare regarding the availability of thesuggested parking slot.Surface irregularities, e.g. onconstruction zones, are not detectedby the system. The driver acceptsresponsibility.NoteAfter production, the systemrequires a calibration. For optimalparking guidance, a driving distanceof at least 10 km, including a numberof bends, is required.

Side blind spot alertThe Side blind spot alert systemdetects and reports objects on eitherside of the vehicle, within a specified"blind spot" zone. The systemdisplays a visual alert in each exteriormirror, when detecting objects thatmay not be visible in the interior andexterior mirrors.Side blind spot alert uses some of theadvanced parking assist sensorswhich are located in the front and rearbumper on both sides of the vehicle.


9 Warning

Side blind spot alert does notreplace driver vision.The system does not detect:

● vehicles outside the side blindzones which may be rapidlyapproaching

● pedestrians, cyclists or animalsBefore changing a lane, alwayscheck all mirrors, look over theshoulder and use the turn signal.

When the system detects a vehicle inthe side blind zone while drivingforwards, either while passing avehicle or being passed, a yellowwarning symbol B will illuminate inthe relevant exterior mirror. If thedriver then activates the turn signal,the warning symbol B starts flashingyellow as a warning not to changelanes.

NoteIf the overtaking vehicle is at least10 km/h faster than the vehicle beingovertaken, the warning symbol B inthe relevant exterior mirror may notilluminate.

Side blind spot alert is active fromspeeds of 10 km/h up to 140 km/h.Driving faster than 140 km/hdeactivates the system, indicated bylow lighting warning symbols B inboth exterior mirrors. Reducing thespeed again will extinguish thewarning symbols. If a vehicle is thendetected in the blind zone, thewarning symbols B will illuminate asnormal on the relevant side.

When the vehicle is started, bothexterior mirror displays will brieflyilluminate to indicate that the systemis operating.The system can be activated ordeactivated in the Info-Display.Vehicle personalisation 3 125.Deactivation is indicated by amessage in the Driver InformationCentre.

Detection zonesThe detection zones start at the rearbumper and extend approx.three metres rearwards and to thesides. The height of the zone isapprox. between half a metre andtwo metres off the ground.The system is deactivated if thevehicle is towing a trailer or if a bikecarrier is attached.Side blind spot alert is designed toignore stationary objects, e.g.guardrails, posts, curbs, walls andbeams. Parked vehicles or oncomingvehicles are not detected.


FaultOccasional missed alerts can occurunder normal circumstances and willincrease in wet conditions.Side blind spot alert does not operatewhen the left or right corners of therear bumper are covered with mud,dirt, snow, ice, slush, or in heavyrainstorms. Cleaning instructions3 273.In the event of a fault in the system orif the system does not work due totemporary conditions, the symbols inthe mirrors will be permanentlyilluminated and a message isdisplayed in the Driver InformationCentre. Seek the assistance of aworkshop.

Rear view cameraThe rear view camera assists thedriver when reversing by displaying aview of the area behind the vehicle.The view of the camera is displayedin the Colour-Info-Display.

9 Warning

The rear view camera does notreplace driver vision. Note thatobjects that are outside thecamera's field of view and theadvanced parking assist sensors,e.g. below the bumper orunderneath the vehicle, are notdisplayed.Do not reverse the vehicle by onlylooking at the Info-Display andcheck the surrounding areabehind and around the vehiclebefore reversing.

ActivationRear view camera is automaticallyactivated when reverse gear isengaged.

Functionality

On 5-door hatchback the camera ismounted between the number platelights.On Sports Tourer the camera ismounted under the tailgate moulding.


The area displayed by the camera islimited. The distance of the image thatappears on the display differs fromthe actual distance.

Guiding linesDynamic guiding lines are horizontallines at one metre intervals projectedonto the picture to define the distanceto displayed objects.

Trajectory lane of the vehicle isshown in accordance with thesteering angle.

Warning symbolsWarning symbols are indicated astriangles 9 on the picture, which showobstacles detected by the rearsensors of the advanced parkingassist.Additionally, 9 appears on the topline of the Info-Display with thewarning to check the vehiclesurrounding.

DeactivationThe camera is switched off when acertain forward speed is exceeded orif reverse gear is not engaged forapprox. 15 seconds.

Deactivation of guiding lines andwarning symbols

7'' Colour-Info-Display: Activation ordeactivation of the visual guiding linesand the warning symbols can bechanged via touch buttons in thelower zone of the display.8'' Colour-Info-Display: Activation ordeactivation of the visual guiding linesand the warning symbols can be


changed in the Settings menu in theInfo-Display. Select the relevantsetting in Settings, I Rear Camera.Info-Display 3 121.Vehicle personalisation 3 125.

FaultFault messages are displayed with a9 on the top line of the Info-Display.The rear view camera may notoperate properly when:● The surrounding is dark.● The sun or the beam of

headlights is shining directly intothe camera lens.

● Ice, snow, mud, or anything elsecovers the camera lens. Cleanthe lens, rinse it with water, andwipe it with a soft cloth.

● The vehicle is towing a trailer.● The vehicle had a rear end

accident.● There are extreme temperature

changes.

Traffic sign assistantFunctionalityTraffic sign assistant detectsdesignated traffic signs via a frontcamera and displays them in theDriver Information Centre.If the vehicle is equipped with anembedded navigation system, trafficsigns from data maps may beincluded additionally.

Traffic signs, which will be detected,are:

Limit and no passing signs● speed limit● no passing● end of speed limit● end of no passing

Road signsBeginning and end of:● city regions (country-specific)● motorways● A-roads● play streets

Add on signs● additional hints to traffic signs● restriction of trailer towing● tractor constraints● wet warning● ice warning● time constraints● distance constraints● direction arrows

Speed limit signs and no passingsigns are displayed in the DriverInformation Centre until the next


speed limit sign or end of speed limitis detected or up to a defined signtimeout.

Indication of multiple signs on thedisplay is possible.

An exclamation mark in a frameindicates that there is an additionalsign detected which cannot be clearlyidentified by the system.The system operates without loss ofperformance up to a speed of200 km/h depending on the lightingconditions. At night the system isactive up to a speed of 160 km/h.

Display indicationInformation about the currently validtraffic signs is available on thedesignated traffic sign assistant pagein the Driver Information Centre.

Additionally, the currently valid speedlimit is displayed permanently in thelower line of the Driver InformationCentre. In case a speed limit with addon sign is available, a + symbol isdisplayed in this area.

On Midlevel display, choose InfoMenu ? via MENU and selecttraffic sign assistant page with theadjuster wheel on the turn signal lever3 115.


On Uplevel display, choose InfoMenu via right steering wheel buttonsand press P or Q to select trafficsign assistant page 3 115.When another page on the DriverInformation Centre menu wasselected and then traffic signassistant page is chosen again, thelast recognised traffic sign will bedisplayed.

Alert functionThe alert function can be activated ordeactivated in the setting menu of thetraffic sign assistant page.

Once activated and when the trafficsign detection page is currently notdisplayed, newly detected speed limitand no passing signs are displayedas pop-up alerts in the DriverInformation Centre.

On Midlevel Display, when traffic signassistant page is displayed, pressSET/CLR on the turn signal lever.

Select Alerts ON or Alerts OFF byturning the adjuster wheel and pressSET/CLR.On Uplevel Display, when traffic signassistant page is displayed, press qon the steering wheel controls.


Activate alerts by setting J,deactivate alerts by setting I viabutton 9.Pop-up alert is displayed for approx.eight seconds in the DriverInformation Centre.

System resetThe content of the traffic sign displaycan be cleared in the setting menu ofthe traffic sign assistant page byselecting Reset and confirm bypressing SET/CLR on the turn signallever or 9 on the steering wheelcontrols.

Alternatively, SET/CLR or 9 can bepressed for three seconds to clear thecontent of the page.Upon successful reset, a chime willsound and the following “DefaultSign” is indicated until the next trafficsign is detected or provided by mapdata of the navigation system.

In some cases, traffic sign assistant iscleared up automatically by thesystem.

Clearing of traffic signsThere are different scenarios thatlead to clearing the currentlydisplayed traffic signs. After clearing,the “Default Sign” or a sign fromnavigation map data is displayed inthe Driver Information Centre.

Reasons for signs being cleared:● A predefined distance was driven

or time has elapsed (differs foreach sign type)

● Vehicle drives through a turn● If no navigation map data is

available and speed drops below52 km/h (city entry detection)

● If navigation map data isavailable and a city entry/exit wasdetected due to map data change

Traffic sign detection inconjunction with navigationsystemIf the vehicle is equipped with anavigation system, the currentlydisplayed sign can either originatefrom optical sign detection or from themap data.If the currently displayed signoriginates from map data and the mapinformation changes, a new sign willbe displayed. This may lead todetection of a new sign although nosign on the road may have beenpassed.


FaultTraffic sign assistant may not operatecorrectly if:● The area of the windscreen,

where the front camera islocated, is not clean or affectedby foreign items, e.g. stickers.

● Traffic signs are completely orpartially covered or difficult todiscern.

● There are adverse environmentalconditions, e.g. heavy rain, snow,direct sunlight or shadows.

● Traffic signs are incorrectlymounted or damaged.

● Traffic signs do not comply withthe Vienna Convention on trafficsigns (Wiener Übereinkommenüber Straßenverkehrszeichen).

Caution

The system is intended to help thedriver within a defined speedrange to discern certain traffic

signs. Do not ignore traffic signswhich are not displayed by thesystem.The system does not discern anyother than the conventional trafficsigns that might give or end aspeed limit.Do not let this special featuretempt you into taking risks whendriving.Always adapt speed to the roadconditions.The driver assistance systems donot relieve the driver from fullresponsibility for vehicleoperation.

Lane keep assistLane keep assist helps to avoidcrashes due to unintentional lanedepartures. The front cameraobserves the lane markings betweenwhich the vehicle is driving. If thevehicle approaches a lane marking,the steering wheel is gently turned toposition the vehicle back into the lane.Turn steering wheel in samedirection, if system steers not

sufficient. Turn steering wheel gentlyinto opposite direction, if lane changeis intended.When crossing a lane markingsignificantly, lane keep assist starts avisual and acoustic warning.Unintended lane departure isassumed● without using turn signal● using the turn signal in the

opposite direction of the lanedeparture

● without braking● without acceleration● without active steering.NoteThe system is switched off duringdetection of ambiguous lanemarkings, e.g. in construction areas.NoteThe system may be switched off if itdetects lanes which are too narrow,too wide or too curved.


Activation

The lane keep assist is activated bypressing a. The LED in the buttonilluminates to indicate that the systemis switched on.

When the control indicator a in theinstrument cluster illuminates green,the system is ready to assist.

The system is operational at vehiclespeeds between 60 km/h and180 km/h and if lane markings areavailable.The system gently turns the steeringwheel and the control indicator achanges to yellow, if the vehicleapproaches a detected lane markingwithout using the turn signal in thatdirection.The system alerts by flashing atogether with three chimes, from therespective direction, if the lane isdeparted significantly.The system is only operable when alane marking is detected.If the system only detects lanemarkings on one side of the road, itwill only assist for this side.Lane keep assist detects hands-freedriving. In this case a message in theDriver Information Centre pops-upand a chime sounds as long as lanekeep assist detects hands-freedriving.

DeactivationThe system is deactivated bypressing a; the LED in the buttonextinguishes.

FaultThe system performance may beaffected by:● Windscreen not clean or affected

by foreign items, e.g. stickers● Close vehicles ahead● Banked roads● Winding or hilly roads● Road edges● Roads with poor lane markings● Sudden lighting changes● Adverse environmental

conditions e.g. heavy rain orsnow

● Vehicle modifications, e.g. tyres.Switch off the system if the system isdisturbed by tar marks, shadows,road cracks, temporary orconstruction lane markings, or otherroad imperfections.


9 Warning

Always keep your attention on theroad and maintain proper vehicleposition within the lane, otherwisevehicle damage, injury or deathcould occur.Lane keep assist does notcontinuously steer the vehicle.The system may not keep thevehicle in the lane or give an alert,even if a lane marking is detected.The steering of the lane keepassist may not be sufficient toavoid a lane departure.The system may not detect hands-off driving due to externalinfluences (road condition andsurface, weather etc). The driverhas full responsibility to control thevehicle and is always required tokeep the hands on the steeringwheel while driving.Using the system while towing atrailer or on slippery roads couldcause loss of control of the vehicleand a crash. Switch the system off.

FuelFuel for petrol enginesOnly use unleaded fuel that complieswith European standard EN 228 orequivalent.The engine is capable of running withfuel that contains up to 10% ethanol(e.g. named E10).Use fuel with the recommendedoctane rating. A lower octane ratingcan reduce engine power and torqueand slightly increases fuelconsumption.

Caution

Do not use fuel or fuel additivesthat contain metallic compoundssuch as manganese-basedadditives. This may cause enginedamage.

Caution

Use of fuel that does not comply toEN 228 or equivalent can lead todeposits or engine damage.

Caution

Use of fuel with a lower octanerating than the lowest possiblerating could lead to uncontrolledcombustion and engine damage.

The engine-specific requirementsregarding octane rating are given inthe engine data overview 3 285. Acountry-specific label at the fuel fillerflap can supersede the requirement.

Fuel additives outside EuropeFuel should contain detergentadditives that help prevent engineand fuel system deposits fromforming. Clean fuel injectors andintake valves will allow the emissioncontrol system to work properly.


Some fuel does not contain sufficientquantities of additive to keep fuelinjectors and intake valves clean.To make up for this lack ofdetergency, add Fuel SystemTreatment PLUS to the fuel tank atevery engine oil change or every15,000 km, whichever occurs first. Itis available at your workshop.Fuels containing oxygenates such asethers and ethanol, as well asreformulated fuel, are available insome cities. If these fuels comply withthe previously describedspecification, then they areacceptable to use. However, E85(85% ethanol) and other fuelscontaining more than 15% ethanolmust be used only in FlexFuelvehicles.

Caution

Do not use fuel containingmethanol. It can corrode metalparts in the fuel system and alsodamage plastic and rubber parts.This damage would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

Some fuels, mainly high octaneracing fuels, can contain an octaneenhancing additive calledmethylcyclopentadienyl manganesetricarbonyl (MMT). Do not use fuels orfuel additives with MMT as they canreduce spark plug life and affectemission control systemperformance. The malfunctionindicator light Z may turn on 3 111.If this occurs, seek the assistance ofa workshop.

Fuel for diesel enginesOnly use diesel fuel that complieswith EN 590 and which has a sulphurconcentration of max. 10 ppm.Fuels with a biodiesel (compliant withEN 14214) content of max. 7% byvolume may be used (e.g. namedB7).If travelling in countries outside theEuropean Union occasional use ofEuro-Diesel fuel with a sulphurconcentration below 50 ppm ispossible.

Caution

Frequent usage of diesel fuelcontaining more than 15 ppmsulphur will cause severe enginedamage.

Caution

Use of fuel that does not comply toEN 590 or similar can lead toengine powerloss, increased wearor engine damage and may affectyour warranty.

Do not use marine diesel oils, heatingoils, Aquazole and similar diesel-water emulsions. Diesel fuels mustnot be diluted with fuels for petrolengines.

Low temperature operationAt temperatures below 0° C, somediesel products with biodiesel blendsmay clog, freeze or gel, which mayaffect the fuel supply system. Startingand engine operation may not work


properly. Make sure to fill wintergrade diesel fuel at ambienttemperatures below 0°C.Arctic grade diesel fuel can be usedin extreme cold temperatures below-20° C. Using this fuel grade in warmor hot climates is not recommendedand may cause engine stalling, poorstarting or damage on the fuelinjection system.

Fuel for natural gasoperationNatural gas is known as CNG(Compressed Natural Gas).Use natural gas with a methanecontent of approx. 78 - 99%. L-gas(low) has approx. 78 - 87% and H-gas(high) has approx. 87 - 99%. Biogaswith the same methane content canalso be used if it has been chemicallyprepared and desulphurised.Only use natural gas or biogas thatcomplies with DIN 51624.Liquid gas or LPG must not be used.

Refuelling

9 Danger

Before refuelling, switch offignition and any external heaterswith combustion chambers.Follow the operating and safetyinstructions of the filling stationwhen refuelling.

9 Danger

Fuel is flammable and explosive.No smoking. No naked flames orsparks.If you can smell fuel in yourvehicle, have the cause of thisremedied immediately by aworkshop.

Caution

In case of misfuelling, do notswitch on ignition.

Fuel filler flap is located at right rearside of the vehicle.


The fuel filler flap can only be openedif the vehicle is unlocked. Release thefuel filler flap by pushing the flap.

Petrol and Diesel refuellingTo open, turn the cap slowlyanticlockwise.

The fuel filler cap can be retained inthe bracket on the fuel filler flap.To refuel, fully insert the pump nozzleand switch it on.After the automatic cut-off, the tankcan be topped up by operating thepump nozzle a maximum of two moretimes.

Caution

Wipe off any overflowing fuelimmediately.

To close, turn the fuel filler capclockwise until it clicks.

Close the flap and engage.

Natural gas refuelling

The fuel filler flap can only be openedif the vehicle is unlocked. Release thefuel filler flap by pushing the flap.

9 Warning

Refuel only with a maximumoutput pressure of 250 bar. Useonly temperature-compensatedfilling stations.

The refuelling procedure must becompleted, i.e. the filler neck must bevented.


The capacity of the natural gas tankdepends on outside temperature,filling pressure, gas composition andtype of refuelling system. Capacities3 292.Close the flap and allow it to engage.Terms for "natural gas vehicles"abroad:

German Erdgasfahrzeuge

English NGVs = Natural Gas Vehi‐cles

French Véhicules au gaz naturel -or - Véhicules GNV

Italian Metano auto

Terms for "natural gas" abroad:

German Erdgas

English CNG = CompressedNatural Gas

French GNV = Gaz Naturel (pour)Véhicules - or -CGN = carburantgaznaturel

Italian Metano (per auto)

Fuel filler capOnly use genuine fuel filler caps.Diesel-engined vehicles have specialfuel filler caps.

Fuel consumption - CO2-EmissionsPetrol and Diesel enginesThe fuel consumption (combined) ofthe model Opel Astra is within a rangeof 6.2 to 3.3 l/100 km.The CO2 emission (combined) iswithin a range of 142 to 88 g/km.For the values specific for yourvehicle, refer to the EEC Certificate ofConformity provided with your vehicleor other national registrationdocuments.

Natural gas enginesThe gas consumption (combined) ofthe model Opel Astra is4.5 kg/100 km.The CO2 emission (combined) is123 g/km.

For the values specific to yourvehicle, refer to the EEC Certificate ofConformity provided with your vehicleor other national registrationdocuments.

General informationThe official fuel consumption andspecific CO2 emission figures quotedrelate to the EU base model withstandard equipment.Fuel consumption data and CO2emission data are determinedaccording to regulation R (EC)No. 715/2007 (in the latest applicableversion), taking into consideration thevehicle weight in running order, asspecified by the regulation.The figures are provided only for thepurpose of comparison betweendifferent vehicle variants and mustnot be taken as a guarantee for theactual fuel consumption of aparticular vehicle. Additionalequipment may result in slightlyhigher results than the statedconsumption and CO2 figures.


Furthermore, fuel consumption isdependent on personal driving styleas well as road and traffic conditions.

Trailer hitchGeneral informationOnly use towing equipment that hasbeen approved for your vehicle.Entrust retrofitting of towingequipment to a workshop. It may benecessary to make changes thataffect the cooling system, heatshields or other equipment.The bulb outage detection function fortrailer brake light cannot detect apartial bulb outage, e.g. in case of fourtimes five watt bulbs, the function onlydetects lamp outage when only asingle five Watt lamp remains or noneremain.Fitting of towing equipment couldcover the opening of the towing eye.If this is the case use the coupling ballbar for towing. Always keep thecoupling ball bar in the vehicle whennot in use.

Driving characteristics andtowing tipsBefore attaching a trailer, lubricatethe coupling ball. However, do not doso if a stabiliser, which acts on thecoupling ball, is being used to reducesnaking movements.During trailer towing do not exceed aspeed of 80 km/h. A maximum speedof 100 km/h is only appropriate if anoscillation damper is used and thepermissible gross trailer weight doesnot exceed the vehicle’s curb weight.For trailers with low driving stabilityand caravan trailers, the use of anoscillation damper is stronglyrecommended.If the trailer starts snaking, drive moreslowly, do not attempt to correct thesteering and brake sharply ifnecessary.When driving downhill, drive in thesame gear as if driving uphill anddrive at a similar speed.Adjust tyre pressure to the valuespecified for full load 3 293.


Trailer towingTrailer loadsThe permissible trailer loads arevehicle and engine-dependentmaximum values which must not beexceeded. The actual trailer load isthe difference between the actualgross weight of the trailer and theactual coupling socket load with thetrailer coupled.The permissible trailer loads arespecified in the vehicle documents. Ingeneral, they are valid for gradientsup to 12%.The permissible trailer load appliesup to the specified incline and at sealevel. Since engine power decreasesas altitude increases due to the airbecoming thinner, therefore reducingclimbing ability, the permissible grosstrain weight also decreases by 10%for every 1000 metres of altitude. Thegross train weight does not have to bereduced when driving on roads withslight inclines (less than 8%, e.g.motorways).

The permissible gross train weightmust not be exceeded. This weight isspecified on the identification plate3 280.

Vertical coupling loadThe vertical coupling load is the loadexerted by the trailer on the couplingball. It can be varied by changing theweight distribution when loading thetrailer.The maximum permissible verticalcoupling load (75 kg) is specified onthe towing equipment identificationplate and in the vehicle documents.Always aim for the maximum load,especially in the case of heavytrailers. The vertical coupling loadshould never fall below 25 kg.

Rear axle loadWhen the trailer is coupled and thetowing vehicle fully loaded, thepermissible rear axle load (seeidentification plate or vehicledocuments) may be exceeded by40 kg. If the permissible rear axle loadis exceeded, a maximum speed of100 km/h applies.

Towing equipment

Caution

When operating without a trailer,remove the coupling ball bar.

Stowage of coupling ball barThe bag with the coupling ball bar isstowed on the rear floor cover in theload compartment.Place the strap through the rear rightlashing eye, wrap around twice andtighten the strap to secure the bag.

Illustration shows 5-door hatchback.


Illustration shows Sports Tourer.

Fitting the coupling ball bar

On Sports Tourer remove cover fromrear bumper by pushing.

Disengage and fold down theconnecting socket. Remove thesealing plug from the opening for thecoupling ball bar and stow it.

Checking the tensioning of thecoupling ball bar

● Red marking on rotary knob mustpoint towards green marking oncoupling ball bar.

● The gap between the rotary knoband the coupling ball bar must beapprox. 6 mm.

● The key must be in position c.Otherwise, the coupling ball bar mustbe tensioned before being inserted:● Unlock coupling ball bar by

turning key to position c.


● Pull out rotary knob and turnclockwise as far as it will go.

Inserting the coupling ball bar

Insert the tensioned coupling ball barin the opening and push firmlyupwards until it audibly engages.The rotary handle snaps back into itsoriginal position resting against thecoupling ball bar without a gap.

9 Warning

Do not touch rotary handle duringinsertion.

Lock the coupling ball bar by turningthe key to position e. Remove the keyand close the protective flap.

Eye for break-away stopping cable

Attach breakaway stopping cable toeye.

Check that the coupling ball bar iscorrectly installed● Green marking on rotary knob

must point towards greenmarking on coupling ball bar.

● There must be no gap betweenthe rotary handle and thecoupling ball bar.

● The coupling ball bar must befirmly engaged in the opening.

● The coupling ball bar must belocked and the key removed.

9 Warning

Towing a trailer is permitted onlywhen a coupling ball bar is fittedcorrectly. If the coupling ball bardoes not engage correctly, seekthe assistance of a workshop.


Dismounting the coupling ball bar

Open the protective flap and turn thekey to position c to unlock thecoupling ball bar.Pull out rotary handle and turnclockwise as far as it will go. Pull outcoupling ball bar downwards.Insert sealing plug in opening.Fold away connecting socket.

On Sports Tourer insert cover intorear bumper as shown in theillustration.

Stow the coupling ball bar in the bagand secure by fixing the strap throughthe rear right lashing eye. Wraparound twice and tighten the strap tosecure the bag.

Trailer stability assistIf the system detects snakingmovements, engine power is reducedand the vehicle/trailer combination isselectively braked until the snakingceases. While system is working keepsteering wheel as still as possible.Trailer stability assist is a function ofthe Electronic Stability Control 3 180.

Vehicle care 227

Vehicle care

General Information ................... 227Accessories and vehiclemodifications .......................... 227

Vehicle storage ........................ 228End-of-life vehicle recovery ..... 228

Vehicle checks ........................... 229Performing work ...................... 229Bonnet ..................................... 229Engine oil ................................. 230Engine coolant ......................... 231Washer fluid ............................ 232Brakes ..................................... 232Brake fluid ............................... 232Vehicle battery ......................... 233Diesel fuel system bleeding ..... 234Wiper blade replacement ........ 234

Bulb replacement ....................... 235Halogen headlights .................. 235Fog lights ................................. 237Tail lights ................................. 238Side turn signal lights .............. 244Number plate light ................... 244Interior lights ............................ 245Instrument panel illumination ... 245

Electrical system ........................ 245Fuses ....................................... 245Engine compartment fuse box . 246Instrument panel fuse box ....... 248Load compartment fuse box .... 250

Vehicle tools .............................. 252Tools ........................................ 252

Wheels and tyres ....................... 254Winter tyres ............................. 254Tyre designations .................... 254Tyre pressure .......................... 254Tyre pressure monitoringsystem .................................... 255

Tread depth ............................. 259Changing tyre and wheel size . 260Wheel covers ........................... 260Tyre chains .............................. 260Tyre repair kit .......................... 261Wheel changing ....................... 264Spare wheel ............................ 266

Jump starting ............................. 269Towing ....................................... 271

Towing the vehicle ................... 271Towing another vehicle ........... 272

Appearance care ....................... 273Exterior care ............................ 273Interior care ............................. 274

General InformationAccessories and vehiclemodificationsWe recommend the use of genuineparts and accessories and factoryapproved parts specific for yourvehicle type. We cannot assess orguarantee reliability of other products- even if they have a regulatory orotherwise granted approval.Any modification, conversion or otherchanges made to standard vehiclespecifications (including, withoutlimitation, software modifications,modifications of the electronic controlunits) may invalidate the warrantyoffered by Opel. Furthermore, suchchanges may affect driver assistancesystems, may impact fuelconsumption, CO2 emissions andother emissions of the vehicle andcause the vehicle to no longerconform to the operating permit,impacting the validity of your vehicleregistration.

228 Vehicle care

Caution

When transporting the vehicle ona train or on a recovery vehicle, themud flaps might be damaged.

Vehicle storageStorage for a long period of timeIf the vehicle is to be stored for severalmonths:● Wash and wax the vehicle.● Have the wax in the engine

compartment and underbodychecked.

● Clean and preserve the rubberseals.

● Fill up fuel tank completely.● Change the engine oil.● Drain the washer fluid reservoir.● Check the coolant antifreeze and

corrosion protection.● Adjust tyre pressure to the value

specified for full load.

● Park the vehicle in a dry, wellventilated place. Engage first orreverse gear or set selector leverto P. Prevent the vehicle fromrolling.

● Do not apply the parking brake.● Open the bonnet, close all doors

and lock the vehicle.● Disconnect the clamp from the

negative terminal of the vehiclebattery. Beware that all systemsare not functional, e.g. anti-theftalarm system.

Putting back into operationWhen the vehicle is to be put back intooperation:● Connect the clamp to the

negative terminal of the vehiclebattery. Activate the electronicsof the power windows.

● Check tyre pressure.● Fill up the washer fluid reservoir.● Check the engine oil level.● Check the coolant level.● Fit the number plate if necessary.

End-of-life vehicle recoveryInformation on end-of-life vehiclerecovery centres and the recycling ofend-of-life vehicles is available on ourwebsite, where legally required. Onlyentrust this work to an authorisedrecycling centre.

Vehicle care 229

Vehicle checksPerforming work

9 Warning

Only perform engine compartmentchecks when the ignition is off.The cooling fan may startoperating even if the ignition is off.

9 Danger

The ignition system usesextremely high voltage. Do nottouch.

BonnetOpening

Pull the release lever and return it toits original position.

Move the safety catch sideways to theleft vehicle side and open the bonnet.

Secure the bonnet support.

230 Vehicle care

If the bonnet is opened during anAutostop, the engine will be restartedautomatically for safety reasons.

ClosingBefore closing the bonnet, press thesupport into the holder.Lower the bonnet and let it fall into thelatch from a low height (20-25 cm).Check that the bonnet is engaged.

Caution

Do not press the bonnet into thelatch to avoid dents.

Engine oilCheck the engine oil level manuallyon a regular basis to prevent damageto the engine. Ensure that the correctspecification of oil is used.Recommended fluids and lubricants3 277.The maximum engine oilconsumption is 0.6 litres per1000 km.

Check with the vehicle on a levelsurface. The engine must be atoperating temperature and switchedoff for at least five minutes.

Pull out the dipstick, wipe it clean,reinsert fully, pull out and read theengine oil level.

Different dipsticks are useddepending on engine variant.

Vehicle care 231

When the engine oil level hasdropped to the MIN mark, top upengine oil.The engine oil level must not exceedthe MAX mark on the dipstick.We recommend the use of the samegrade of engine oil that was used atlast change.

Caution

Overfilled engine oil must bedrained or suctioned out.

Capacities 3 292.Fit the cap on straight and tighten it.

Engine coolantThe coolant provides freezeprotection down to approx. -28 °C. Incold regions with very lowtemperatures, the factory filledcoolant provides frost protectiondown to approx. -37 °C.

Caution

Only use approved antifreeze.

Coolant and antifreeze 3 277.

Coolant level

Caution

Too low a coolant level can causeengine damage.

If the cooling system is cold, thecoolant level should be above thefilling line mark. Top up if the level islow.

9 Warning

Allow the engine to cool beforeopening the cap. Carefully openthe cap, relieving the pressureslowly.

To top up, use a 1:1 mixture ofreleased coolant concentrate mixedwith clean tap water. If no coolantconcentrate is available, use cleantap water. Install the cap tightly. Havethe coolant concentration checkedand have the cause of the coolantloss remedied by a workshop.

232 Vehicle care

Washer fluid

Fill with clean water mixed with asuitable quantity of approvedwindscreen washer fluid whichcontains antifreeze.

Caution

Only washer fluid with a sufficientantifreeze concentration providesprotection at low temperatures ora sudden drop in temperature.

Washer fluid 3 277.

BrakesIn the event of minimum thickness ofthe brake lining, a squealing noisesounds during braking.Continued driving is possible buthave the brake lining replaced assoon as possible.Once new brake linings are installed,do not brake unnecessarily hard forthe first few journeys.

Brake fluid

9 Warning

Brake fluid is poisonous andcorrosive. Avoid contact with eyes,skin, fabrics and painted surfaces.

The brake fluid level must be betweenthe MIN and MAX marks.If fluid level is below MIN seek theassistance of a workshop.Brake and clutch fluid 3 277.

Vehicle care 233

Vehicle battery

The vehicle battery is located in theload compartment under the rear floorcover behind the rear seats. Rearfloor cover 3 81.There are connecting points for jumpstarting in the engine compartment.Jump starting 3 269.The vehicle battery is maintenance-free provided that the driving profileallows sufficient charging of thebattery. Short-distance-driving andfrequent engine starts can dischargethe battery. Avoid the use ofunnecessary electrical consumers.

Batteries do not belong in householdwaste. They must be disposed of atan appropriate recycling collectionpoint.Laying up the vehicle for more thanfour weeks can lead to batterydischarge. Disconnect the clamp fromthe negative terminal of the vehiclebattery.Ensure the ignition is switched offbefore connecting or disconnectingthe vehicle battery.Battery discharge protection 3 146.

Disconnecting the batteryIf the vehicle's battery is to bedisconnected (e.g. for maintenancework), the alarm siren must bedeactivated as follows: Switch theignition on then off, then disconnectthe vehicle's battery within15 seconds.

Replacing the vehicle batteryNoteAny deviation from the instructionsgiven in this section may lead totemporary deactivation ordisturbance of the stop-start system.

When the vehicle battery is beingreplaced, please ensure that thereare no open ventilation holes in thevicinity of the positive terminal. If aventilation hole is open in this area, itmust be closed off with a dummy cap,and the ventilation in the vicinity of thenegative terminal must be opened.Ensure that the battery is alwaysreplaced by the same type of battery.We recommend that you have thevehicle battery replaced by aworkshop.Stop-start system 3 163.

234 Vehicle care

Charging the vehicle battery

9 Warning

On vehicles with stop-startsystem, ensure that the chargingpotential does not exceed14.6 volts when using a batterycharger. Otherwise the vehiclebattery might be damaged.

Jump starting 3 269.

Warning label

Meaning of symbols:● No sparks, naked flames or

smoking.● Always shield eyes. Explosive

gases can cause blindness orinjury.

● Keep the vehicle battery out ofreach of children.

● The vehicle battery containssulphuric acid which could causeblindness or serious burninjuries.

● See the Owner's Manual forfurther information.

● Explosive gas may be present inthe vicinity of the vehicle battery.

Diesel fuel system bleedingIf the tank has been run dry, the dieselfuel system must be bled. Switch onthe ignition three times for15 seconds at a time. Then crank theengine for a maximum of40 seconds. Repeat this process afterno less than five seconds. If theengine fails to start, seek theassistance of a workshop.

Wiper blade replacement

Lift the wiper arm until it stays in theraised position, press button todisengage the wiper blade andremove.Attach the wiper blade slightly angledto the wiper arm and push until itengages.Lower wiper arm carefully.

Vehicle care 235

Wiper blade on the rear window

Lift wiper arm. Disengage wiper bladeas shown in illustration and remove.Attach the wiper blade slightly angledto the wiper arm and push until itengages.Lower wiper arm carefully.

Bulb replacementSwitch off the ignition and switch offthe relevant switch or close the doors.Only hold a new bulb at the base. Donot touch the bulb glass with barehands.Use only the same bulb type forreplacement.Replace headlight bulbs from withinthe engine compartment.

Bulb checkAfter a bulb replacement switch onthe ignition, operate and check thelights.

Halogen headlightsHalogen headlights with separatebulbs for low beam and high beam.

Low beam (1) outer bulb.High beam (2) inner bulb.

Low beam (1)

236 Vehicle care

1. Rotate the cap anticlockwise andremove it.

2. Disengage spring clip fromretainer by pulling. Withdraw thebulb holder from the reflectorhousing.

3. Detach the bulb from the bulbholder and replace the bulb.

4. Insert the bulb holder, engagingthe two lugs into the reflectorhousing and rotate clockwise tosecure.

5. Push spring clip back in place.6. Fit the cap and rotate clockwise.

High beam (2)

1. Rotate the cap anticlockwise andremove it.

Vehicle care 237

2. Disengage spring clip fromretainer by moving it forward andto the side. Swivel spring clipdownwards.

3. Withdraw the bulb holder from thereflector housing.

4. Detach the bulb from the bulbholder and replace the bulb.

5. Insert the bulb holder and installspring clip.Fit the cap and rotate clockwise.

Front turn signal lightIn case of defective LEDs, have themreplaced by a workshop.

Side lightIn case of defective LEDs, have themreplaced by a workshop.

Daytime running lightIn case of defective LEDs, have themreplaced by a workshop.

Fog lightsThe bulbs are accessible from theunderside of the vehicle.

1. Turn the bulb holder anti-clockwise and remove it from thereflector housing.

2. Disengage the bulb socket fromthe plug connector by pressingthe retaining lug.

3. Remove and replace the bulbsocket with bulb and attach theplug connector.

4. Insert the bulb socket into thereflector housing by turningclockwise and engage.

238 Vehicle care

Tail lights5-door Hatchback

1. Release the cover on therespective side and remove it.

2. Vehicles with tyre repair kit: Toreplace bulbs on the right side,first unscrew the plastic nut andtake out the insert with the sealantbottle.

3. Unscrew the plastic securing nutfrom the inside by hand.

4. Carefully withdraw tail lightassembly from recess andremove.

5. Detach the cable from theretainer.

Vehicle care 239

6. Press the three retaining lugs andremove the bulb carrier from thelight assembly.

7. Remove and replace the bulbs:Turn signal light (1)Tail light/brake light (2)

On version with LED tail lights andLED brake lights, only turn signallight bulb (1) can be removed andreplaced.

8. Attach the bulb carrier to the lightassembly.

9. Attach the cable to the retainer.10. Attach the light assembly to the

vehicle body and tighten thesecuring nut from the inside of theload compartment. Attach cover.

Depending on the version, tail lightsand brake lights are designed asLEDs. In case of failure, have LEDsreplaced by a workshop.

Light assembly in the tailgate

1. Release the cover in the tailgateand remove it.

2. Unscrew the plastic securing nutby hand.

240 Vehicle care

3. Carefully withdraw the lightassembly from the recesses andremove.

4. Detach the plug from the lightassembly.


On version with LED tail lights, theposition of the retaining lugs isslightly different.

6. Remove and replace the bulb:Tail light (1)Rear fog light (2) (left side)Reverse light (2) (right side)

Vehicle care 241

On version with LED tail lightsonly reverse light bulb (1) can beremoved and replaced.

7. Insert the bulb carrier into the taillight assembly. Attach plug to thelight assembly. Fit light assemblyon the tailgate and tighten thescrew from the inside. Attachcover.

Depending on the version, tail lightsare designed as LEDs. In case offailure, have LEDs replaced by aworkshop.

Sports Tourer

1. Release and open the cover onthe respective side.

2. Unscrew both plastic securingnuts from the inside by hand.

3. Carefully withdraw tail lightassembly from recess andremove.

4. Detach the cable from theretainer.

242 Vehicle care

5. Standard tail lights:

Release the retaining lugs andremove the bulb carrier from thelight assembly.

6. Remove and replace the bulbs:

Tail light/brake light (1)Turn signal light (2)

7. Insert the bulb carrier into the lightassembly.

8. LED tail lights:

On version with LED tail lights andLED brake lights, only turn signallight bulb can be replaced:remove bulb holder in the lightassembly by turning. Replacebulb in the bulb holder.

9. Attach the cable to the retainer.10. Attach the light assembly to the

vehicle body and tighten thesecuring nuts from the inside ofthe load compartment. Attachcover.

Depending on the version, tail lightsand brake lights are designed asLEDs. In case of failure, have LEDsreplaced by a workshop.

Light assembly in the tailgate

1. Release the cover in the tailgateand remove it.

Vehicle care 243

2. Unscrew the plastic securing nutby hand.

3. Carefully withdraw the lightassembly from the recesses andremove.


5. Remove and replace the bulb:

Reverse light (1)Tail light (2)Rear fog light (3) (left side)

6. Insert the bulb carrier into the taillight assembly.

7. On version with LED tail lightsonly reverse light bulb can bereplaced: remove bulb holder inthe light assembly by turning.Replace bulb in the bulb holder.

8. Fit light assembly on the tailgateand tighten the securing nut fromthe inside. Attach cover.

244 Vehicle care

Depending on the version, tail lightsare designed as LEDs. In case offailure, have LEDs replaced by aworkshop.

Side turn signal lightsTo replace bulb, remove lamphousing:

1. Slide lamp to its left side andremove with its right end.

2. Turn bulb holder anticlockwiseand remove from housing.

3. Pull bulb from bulb holder andreplace it.

4. Insert bulb holder and turnclockwise.

5. Insert left end of the lamp, slide tothe left and insert right end.

Number plate light

1. Insert screwdriver in recess of thecover, press to the side andrelease spring.

Vehicle care 245

2. Remove lamp downwards, takingcare not to pull on the cable.

3. Remove bulb holder from lamphousing by turning anticlockwise.

4. Pull bulb from bulb holder andreplace it.

5. Insert bulb holder into lamphousing and turn clockwise.

6. Insert lamp into bumper and letengage.

Some versions have LED numberplate lights. In case of defectiveLEDs, have them replaced by aworkshop.

Interior lightsCourtesy light, reading lightsHave bulbs replaced by a workshop.

Load compartment lightHave bulbs replaced by a workshop.

Instrument panelilluminationHave bulbs replaced by a workshop.

Electrical systemFusesData on the replacement fuse mustmatch the data on the defective fuse.There are three fuse boxes in thevehicle:● engine compartment● instrument panel● load compartment

Before replacing a fuse, turn off therespective switch and the ignition.A blown fuse can be recognized by itsmelted wire. Do not replace the fuseuntil the cause of the fault has beenremedied.Some functions are protected byseveral fuses.Fuses may also be inserted withoutexistence of a function.

246 Vehicle care

Fuse extractorA fuse extractor may be located in thefuse box in the engine compartment.

Place the fuse extractor on thevarious types of fuse from the top orside, and withdraw fuse.

Engine compartment fusebox

The fuse box is in the front left of theengine compartment.Disengage the cover and remove it.

Vehicle care 247

No. Circuit

1 Starter

2 Starter

3 Exhaust sensor

4 Engine control module

5 Engine functions

6 Transmission control module

7 –


9 Climate control system

10 Diesel exhaust system

11 Tailgate locking system, Trans‐mission

12 Seat lumbar massage

13 After boil pump


15 Exhaust sensor

16 Fuel injection

17 Fuel injection

No. Circuit



20 –

21 DC/AC Converter

22 ABS

23 Washer system for windscreenand rear window

24 –

25 Diesel fuel heating


27 Power tailgate module

28 –

29 Heated rear window

30 Mirror defrost

31 –

32 DC transformer/LED display/Electrical heater/Climatecontrol/Glow plug controller

248 Vehicle care

No. Circuit

33 Anti theft warning

34 Horn

35 Power outlet load compartment

36 Right high beam (Halogen)/Right low beam (LED)

37 Left high beam (Halogen)

38 LED headlight/Automatic head‐light range adjustment

39 Front fog light

40 OnStar

41 Water in fuel sensor/Waterpump

42 Manual headlight range adjust‐ment

43 Fuel pump

44 Rear view camera/Inside rearview mirror/Trailer module

45 LED headlight left/Automaticheadlight range adjustment left

No. Circuit

46 Instrument cluster

47 Steering column lock

48 Rear wiper

49 –

50 LED headlight right/Automaticheadlight range adjustmentright

51 Left low beam (LED)

52 Engine control module/Trans‐mission control module

53 –

54 Windscreen wiper


56 –

57 –

After having changed defective fuses,close the fuse box cover and pressuntil it engages.If the fuse box cover is not closedcorrectly, malfunction may occur.

Instrument panel fuse boxThe fuse box is located behind acover.

Pull the cover and remove.Vehicles with power connector:If the fuse cover has a powerconnector, it must be removed byusing an adapter and a screwdriver.The adapter is stowed in the glovebox3 71. The screwdriver is stowed in theload compartment 3 252.

Vehicle care 249

Attach the adapter to the powerconnector.

Push the screwdriver through therecess in the adapter. Remove thecover by pulling the screwdriver.

No. Circuit

1 –

2 Climate control system, fan

3 Power seat driver side

4 Cigarette lighter/Power outletfront

5 –

6 Power window front

7 ABS

8 Heated steering wheel

9 Body control module

10 Power window rear

11 Sunroof


13 Seat heating (only on vehicleswithout alarm horn)

14 Exterior mirror



250 Vehicle care

No. Circuit



19 Data link connector

20 Airbag system

21 Climate control system

22 Central locking system, tailgate

23 Electronic key system

24 Power seat memory function

25 Airbag system steering wheel

26 Ignition switch/Steering columnlock


28 USB socket

29 –

30 Selector lever

31 Rear window wiper


No. Circuit

33 Anti-theft alarm system/Powersounder

34 Parking assist/Side blind spotalert/Infotainment system/USBsocket

35 OnStar

36 Info display/Instrument cluster/CD player

37 Infotainment system, radio

After having changed defective fuses,close the fuse box cover and pressuntil it engages.Vehicles with power connector:1. Apply the cover on the right side.

2. Fold the left side of the coverforwards. Take care that thesecuring clamp is guided asshown in the illustration.

Load compartment fuse boxThe fuse box is located on the left sideof the load compartment behind acover.

Vehicle care 251

Remove the cover.

Disengage the fuse box cover andremove it.

No. Circuit

1 –

2 DC/AC Inverter

3 Trailer module

4 Power seat passenger side

5 –

6 Distance warning module

7 –

8 –

9 Rear seat heating (on vehicleswithout alarm horn)

10 Service

11 –

12 Front seat heating (on vehicleswith alarm horn)

13 Rear seat heating (on vehicleswith alarm horn)

14 Ignition

15 Seat ventilation

252 Vehicle care

No. Circuit

16 Trailer outlet

17 Trailer outlet

18 –

19 –

20 –

21 Electrical rear seat folding

22 Power tailgate

After having changed defective fuses,close the fuse box cover and pressuntil it engages.Additional fuses are located near thevehicle battery.

No. Circuit

1 Fuel pump


3 Power supply

Vehicle toolsTools5-door hatchback with sparewheelOpen the floor cover of the loadcompartment 3 81.

The jack, the towing eye, a strap forsecuring a damaged wheel and thetools are located in the tool box belowthe spare wheel. Spare wheel3 266.

Vehicle care 253

Sports Tourer with spare wheelOpen the floor cover of the loadcompartment 3 81.

The jack, the towing eye and the toolsare located in the tool box below thespare wheel. Spare wheel 3 266.

5-door hatchback without sparewheel

Open the cover in the right side wallof the load compartment.Some tools and the towing eye arelocated together with the tyre repairkit in a tool box.

Sports Tourer without sparewheel

Open the cover on the right side of theload compartment.The tools and the towing eye arelocated together with the tyre repairkit in a suitcase.

254 Vehicle care

Wheels and tyres

Tyre condition, wheel conditionDrive over edges slowly and at rightangles if possible. Driving over sharpedges can cause tyre and wheeldamage. Do not trap tyres on the kerbwhen parking.Regularly check the wheels fordamage. Seek the assistance of aworkshop in the event of damage orunusual wear.

Winter tyresWinter tyres improve driving safety attemperatures below 7 °C and shouldtherefore be fitted on all wheels.All tyre sizes are permitted as wintertyres 3 293.In accordance with country-specificregulations, affix the speed sticker inthe driver's field of view.

Tyre designationsE.g. 215/50 R 16 95 H215 : Tyre width, mm50 : Cross-section ratio (tyre height

to tyre width), %R : Belt type: RadialRF : Type: RunFlat16 : Wheel diameter, inches95 : Load index e.g. 95 is

equivalent to 690 kgH : Speed code letter

Speed code letter:Q : up to 160 km/hS : up to 180 km/hT : up to 190 km/hH : up to 210 km/hV : up to 240 km/hW : up to 270 km/h

Choose a tyre appropriate for themaximum speed of your vehicle.The maximum speed is achievable atkerb weight with driver (75 kg) plus125 kg payload. Optional equipmentcould reduce the maximum speed ofthe vehicle.Performance 3 287.

Tyre pressureCheck the pressure of cold tyres atleast every 14 days and before anylong journey. Do not forget the sparewheel.This also applies to vehicles with tyrepressure monitoring system.

Tyre pressure 3 293.The tyre pressure information labelon the left door frame indicates theoriginal equipment tyres and thecorrespondent tyre pressures.The tyre pressure data refers to coldtyres. It applies to summer and wintertyres.

Vehicle care 255

Always inflate the spare tyre to thepressure specified for full load.The ECO tyre pressure serves toachieve the smallest amount of fuelconsumption possible.Incorrect tyre pressures will impairsafety, vehicle handling, comfort andfuel economy and will increase tyrewear.Tyre pressures differ depending onvarious options.For the correct tyre pressure value,follow the procedure below:● Identify the engine identifier

code. Engine data 3 285.● Identify the respective tyre.● The tyre pressure tables show all

possible tyre combinations3 293.

For the tyres approved for yourvehicle, refer to the EEC Certificate ofConformity provided with your vehicleor other national registrationdocuments.The driver is responsible for correctadjustment of tyre pressure.

9 Warning

If the pressure is too low, this canresult in considerable tyre warm-up and internal damage, leading totread separation and even to tyreblow-out at high speeds.

9 Warning

For specific tyres therecommended tyre pressure asshown in the tyre pressure tablemay exceed the maximum tyrepressure as indicated on the tyre.Never exceed the maximum tyrepressure as indicated on the tyre.

If the tyre pressure must be reducedor increased on a vehicle with tyrepressure monitoring system, switchoff ignition.

Temperature dependencyThe tyre pressure depends on thetemperature of the tyre. Duringdriving, tyre temperature andpressure increase. Tyre pressure

values provided on the tyreinformation label and tyre pressurechart are valid for cold tyres, whichmeans at 20 °C.The pressure increases by nearly10 kPa for a 10 °C temperatureincrease. This must be consideredwhen warm tyres are checked.The tyre pressure value displayed inthe Driver Information Centre showsthe real tyre pressure. A cooled downtyre will show a decreased value,which does not indicate an air leak.

Tyre pressure monitoringsystemThe tyre pressure monitoring systemchecks the pressure of all four tyresonce a minute when vehicle speedexceeds a certain limit.

Caution

Tyre pressure monitoring systemwarns only about low tyre pressurecondition and does not replaceregular tyre maintenance by thedriver.

256 Vehicle care

All wheels must be equipped withpressure sensors and the tyres musthave the prescribed pressure.NoteIn countries where the tyre pressuremonitoring system is legallyrequired, the use of wheels withoutpressure sensors will invalidate thevehicle operating permit.

The current tyre pressures can beshown in the Driver InformationCentre.Midlevel display:

Select the Tyre pressure page underthe Vehicle Information Menu ? inthe Driver Information Centre 3 115.

Uplevel display:

Select the Tyre pressure page underthe Info Menu in the DriverInformation Centre 3 115.System status and pressure warningsare displayed by a messageindicating the corresponding tyre inthe Driver Information Centre.The system considers the tyretemperature for the warnings.Temperature dependency 3 254.

A detected low tyre pressurecondition is indicated by the controlindicator w 3 113.If w illuminates, stop as soon aspossible and inflate the tyres asrecommended 3 293.If w flashes for 60-90 seconds thenilluminates continuously, there is afault in the system. Consult aworkshop.After inflating, some driving may berequired to update the tyre pressurevalues in the Driver InformationCentre. During this time w mayilluminate.If w illuminates at lower temperaturesand extinguishes after driving, thiscould be an indicator for approachinga low tyre pressure condition. Checktyre pressure.Vehicle messages 3 123.

Vehicle care 257

If the tyre pressure must be reducedor increased, switch off ignition.Only mount wheels with pressuresensors, otherwise the tyre pressurewill not be displayed and willuminates continuously.A spare wheel or temporary sparewheel is not equipped with pressuresensors. The tyre pressuremonitoring system is not operationalfor these tyres. Control indicator willuminates. For the further threetyres, the system remainsoperational.The use of commercially-availableliquid tyre repair kits can impair thefunction of the system. Factory-approved repair kits can be used.Operating electronic devices or beingclose to facilities using similar wavefrequencies could disrupt the tyrepressure monitoring system.Each time the tyres are replaced, tyrepressure monitoring system sensorsmust be dismounted and serviced.For the screwed sensor, replacevalve core and sealing ring. For theclipped sensor, replace completevalve stem.

Vehicle loading statusAdjust tyre pressure to load conditionaccording to the tyre information labelor tyre pressure chart 3 293, andselect the appropriate setting in themenu Tyre Load in the DriverInformation Centre, VehicleInformation Menu 3 115. This settingis the reference for the tyre pressurewarnings.The Tyre load menu only appearswhen the vehicle is at a standstill andthe parking brake is applied. Onvehicles with automatic transmissionthe selector lever must be in P.Midlevel display:

Select the Tyre load page under theVehicle Information Menu ? in theDriver Information Centre 3 115.Select● Light for comfort pressure up to

three people.● Eco for Eco pressure up to three

people.● Max for full loading.

Uplevel display:

Select the Tyre load page under theOptions Menu in the DriverInformation Centre 3 115.

258 Vehicle care

Select● Light for comfort pressure up to

three people.● Eco for Eco pressure up to

three people.● Max for full loading.

Tyre pressure sensor matchingprocessEach tyre pressure sensor has aunique identification code. Theidentification code must be matchedto a new wheel position after rotatingthe wheels or exchanging thecomplete wheel set and if one or moretyre pressure sensors were replaced.The tyre pressure sensor matchingprocess should also be performedafter replacing a spare wheel with aroad wheel containing the tyrepressure sensor.The malfunction light w and thewarning message or code should gooff at the next ignition cycle. Thesensors are matched to the wheelpositions, using a relearn tool, in thefollowing order: left side front wheel,right side front wheel, right side rear

wheel and left side rear wheel. Theturn signal light at the current activeposition is illuminated until sensor ismatched.Consult a workshop for service. Thereare two minutes to match the firstwheel position, and five minutesoverall to match all four wheelpositions. If it takes longer, thematching process stops and must berestarted.The tyre pressure sensor matchingprocess is:1. Apply the parking brake.2. Turn the ignition on.3. On vehicles with automatic

transmission: set the selectorlever to P.On vehicles with manualtransmission: select neutral.

4. Midlevel display:Use MENU on the turn signallever to select the VehicleInformation Menu ? in theDriver Information Centre.Uplevel display:

Press p on the steering wheel toopen main menu page.Select the Info page with Q or P.Confirm with 9.

5. Select the tyre pressure menu.Midlevel display:

Uplevel display:

Vehicle care 259

6. Midlevel display:Press SET/CLR to begin thesensor matching process. Amessage requesting acceptanceof the process should bedisplayed.Press SET/CLR again to confirmthe selection. The horn soundstwice to indicate that the receiveris in relearn mode.Uplevel display:Press 9 to begin the sensormatching process. The hornsounds twice to indicate that thereceiver is in relearn mode.

7. Start with the left side front wheel.

8. Place the relearn tool against thetyre sidewall, near the valve stem.Then press the button to activatethe tyre pressure sensor. A hornchirp confirms that the sensoridentification code has beenmatched to this wheel position.

9. Proceed to the right side frontwheel, and repeat the procedurein Step 8.

10. Proceed to the right side rearwheel, and repeat the procedurein Step 8.

11. Proceed to the left side rearwheel, and repeat the procedurein Step 8. The horn sounds twiceto indicate that the sensoridentification code has beenmatched to the left side rearwheel, and the tyre pressuresensor matching process is nolonger active.

12. Turn off the ignition.

13. Set all four tyres to therecommended air pressure levelas indicated on the tyre pressureinformation label.

14. Ensure the tyre loading status isset according to the selectedpressure 3 115.

Tread depthCheck tread depth at regularintervals.Tyres should be replaced for safetyreasons at a tread depth of 2-3 mm(4 mm for winter tyres).For safety reasons it is recommendedthat the tread depth of the tyres onone axle should not vary by more than2 mm.

260 Vehicle care

The legally permissible minimumtread depth (1.6 mm) has beenreached when the tread has worndown as far as one of the tread wearindicators (TWI). Their position isindicated by markings on thesidewall.If there is more wear at the front thanthe rear, swap round front wheels andrear wheels periodically. Ensure thatthe direction of rotation of the wheelsremains the same.Tyres age, even if they are not used.We recommend tyre replacementevery six years.

Changing tyre and wheelsizeIf tyres of a different size than thosefitted at the factory are used, it may benecessary to reprogramme thespeedometer as well as the nominaltyre pressure and make other vehiclemodifications.After converting to a different tyresize, have the label with tyrepressures replaced and the tyredeflation detection systemreinitialised. 3 255

9 Warning

The use of unsuitable tyres orwheels may lead to accidents andwill invalidate the vehicleoperating permit.

Wheel coversWheel covers and tyres that arefactory approved for the respectivevehicle and comply with all of therelevant wheel and tyre combinationrequirements must be used.

If the wheel covers and tyres used arenot factory approved, the tyres mustnot have a rim protection ridge.Wheel covers must not impair brakecooling.

9 Warning

Use of unsuitable tyres or wheelcovers could lead to suddenpressure loss and therebyaccidents.

Tyre chains

Tyre chains are only permitted on thefront wheels.

Vehicle care 261

Always use fine mesh chains that addno more than 10 mm to the tyre treadand the inboard sides (including chainlock).

9 Warning

Damage may lead to tyre blowout.

Tyre chains are permitted on tyres ofsize 195/65 R15, 205/55 R16 and215/55 R16.

Temporary spare wheelThe use of tyre chains is not permittedon the temporary spare wheel.

Tyre repair kitMinor damage to the tyre tread can berepaired with the tyre repair kit.Do not remove foreign bodies fromthe tyres.Tyre damage exceeding 4 mm or thatis at tyre's sidewall cannot be repairedwith the tyre repair kit.

9 Warning

Do not drive faster than 80 km/h.Do not use for a lengthy period.Steering and handling may beaffected.

If you have a flat tyre:Apply the parking brake and engagefirst gear, reverse gear or P.

On 5-door hatchback the tyre repairkit is on the right side in the loadcompartment behind a cover.

On Sports Tourer the tyre repair kit isin a suitcase on the right side of theload compartment behind a cover.The suitcase is secured with a strap.1. Remove the sealant bottle.2. Insert thumb into the opening and

pull out the compressor.

262 Vehicle care

3. Remove the electrical connectioncable and air hose from thestowage compartments on theunderside of the compressor.

4. Screw the compressor air hose tothe connection on the sealantbottle.

5. Fit the sealant bottle into theretainer on the compressor.Set the compressor near the tyrein such a way that the sealantbottle is upright.

6. Unscrew valve cap from defectivetyre.

7. Screw the filler hose to the tyrevalve.

8. The switch on the compressormust be set to J.

9. Connect the compressor plug tothe power outlet or cigarettelighter socket.To avoid discharging the battery,we recommend running theengine.

10. Set the rocker switch on thecompressor to I. The tyre is filledwith sealant.

11. The compressor pressure gaugebriefly indicates up to 6 bar whilstthe sealant bottle is emptying(approx. 30 seconds). Then thepressure starts to drop.

12. All of the sealant is pumped intothe tyre. Then the tyre is inflated.

Vehicle care 263

13. The prescribed tyre pressureshould be obtained within tenminutes.Tyre pressure 3 293.When the correct pressure isobtained, switch off thecompressor.

If the prescribed tyre pressure isnot obtained within ten minutes,remove the tyre repair kit. Movethe vehicle one tyre rotation.Reattach the tyre repair kit andcontinue the filling procedure forten minutes. If the prescribed tyrepressure is still not obtained, thetyre is too badly damaged. Seekthe assistance of a workshop.

Drain excess tyre pressure withthe button over the pressureindicator.Do not run the compressor longerthan ten minutes.

14. Detach the tyre repair kit. Pushcatch on bracket to removesealant bottle from bracket. Screwthe tyre inflation hose to the freeconnection of the sealant bottle.This prevents sealant fromescaping. Stow tyre repair kit inload compartment.

15. Remove any excess sealantusing a cloth.

16. Take the label indicatingmaximum permitted speed fromthe sealant bottle and affix in thedriver's field of view.

17. Continue driving immediately sothat sealant is evenly distributedin the tyre. After driving approx.10 km (but no more than tenminutes), stop and check tyrepressure. Screw compressor airhose directly onto tyre valve andcompressor when doing this.

If tyre pressure is more than1.3 bar, set it to the correct value.Repeat the procedure until thereis no more loss of pressure.If the tyre pressure has fallenbelow 1.3 bar, the vehicle mustnot be used. Seek the assistanceof a workshop.

18. Stow away tyre repair kit in loadcompartment.

264 Vehicle care

NoteThe driving characteristics of therepaired tyre are severely affected,therefore have this tyre replaced.If unusual noise is heard or thecompressor becomes hot, turncompressor off for at least30 minutes.The built-in safety valve opens at apressure of seven bar.Note the expiry date of the kit. Afterthis date its sealing capability is nolonger guaranteed. Pay attention tostorage information on sealantbottle.Replace the used sealant bottle.Dispose of the bottle as prescribedby applicable laws.The compressor and sealant can beused from approx. -30 °C.The adapters supplied can be usedto pump up other items e.g.footballs, air mattresses, inflatabledinghies etc. They are located on theunderside of the compressor. Toremove, screw on compressor airhose and withdraw adapter.

Wheel changingSome vehicles are equipped with atyre repair kit instead of a spare wheel3 261.Make the following preparations andobserve the following information:● Park the vehicle on a level, firm

and non-skid surface. The frontwheels must be in the straight-ahead position.

● Apply the parking brake andengage first gear, reverse gear orP.

● Remove the spare wheel 3 266.● Never change more than one

wheel at once.● Use the jack only to change

wheels in case of puncture, notfor seasonal winter or summertyre change.

● The jack is maintenance-free.● If the ground on which the vehicle

is standing is soft, a solid board(max. one cm thick) should beplaced under the jack.

● Take heavy objects out of thevehicle before jacking up.

● No people or animals may be inthe vehicle when it is jacked-up.

● Never crawl under a jacked-upvehicle.

● Do not start the vehicle when it israised on the jack.

● Clean wheel nuts and thread witha clean cloth before mounting thewheel.

9 Warning

Do not grease wheel bolt, wheelnut and wheel nut cone.

1. Disengage wheel nut caps with ascrewdriver and remove. For alloywheels, place a soft clothunderneath the screwdriver. Pulloff the wheel cover. Vehicle tools3 252.

Vehicle care 265

2. Fold out the wheel wrench andinstall ensuring that it locatessecurely and loosen each wheelnut by half a turn.

3. Ensure the jack is correctlypositioned under the relevantvehicle jacking point.

4. Set the jack to the necessaryheight. Position it directly belowthe jacking point in a manner thatprevents it from slipping.

Ensure that the edge of the bodyfits into the notch of the jack.

Attach wheel wrench and with thejack correctly aligned rotate wheelwrench until wheel is clear of the

266 Vehicle care

ground. Do not raise the jack anyfurther.

5. Unscrew the wheel nuts.6. Change the wheel. Spare wheel

3 266.7. Screw on the wheel nuts.8. Lower the vehicle and remove

jack.9. Install the wheel wrench ensuring

that it is located securely andtighten each nut in a crosswisesequence. Tightening torque is140 Nm.

10. Align the valve hole in the wheelcover with the tyre valve beforeinstalling.Install wheel nut caps.

11. Stow the replaced wheel 3 266and the vehicle tools 3 252.

12. Check the tyre pressure of theinstalled tyre and the wheel nuttorque as soon as possible.

Have the defective tyre renewed orrepaired as soon as possible.

Jacking position for lifting platform

Rear arm position of the liftingplatform under the rear recess of thesill.

Front arm position of the liftingplatform at the underbody.

Spare wheelIf mounting a spare wheel which isdifferent from the other wheels, thiswheel might be classified as atemporary spare wheel and thecorresponding speed limits apply,even though no label indicates this.Seek the assistance of a workshop tocheck the applicable speed limit.The spare wheel has a steel rim.

Caution

The use of a spare wheel that issmaller than the other wheels or incombination with winter tyrescould affect driveability. Have thedefective tyre replaced as soon aspossible.

Vehicle care 267

The spare wheel is located in the loadcompartment beneath the floorcovering.To remove:1. Open the floor cover 3 81.2. The spare wheel is secured with a

wing nut. Unscrew nut and takeout the spare wheel.Under the spare wheel there is thebox with vehicle tools.

3. When, after a wheel change, nowheel is placed in the spare wheelwell, secure the tool box bytightening the wing nut as far as itwill go and close floor cover.

4. After wheel change back to fullsize wheel, place the spare wheeloutside up in the well and securewith the wing nut.

Stowing a damaged full sizewheel in the load compartment, 5-door hatchbackThe spare wheel well is not designedfor other tyre sizes than the sparewheel. A damaged full size wheelmust be stowed in the loadcompartment and secured with astrap. Vehicle tools 3 252. To securethe wheel:1. Position the wheel outside up

close to one sidewall of the loadcompartment.

2. Place the loop end of the strapthrough the front lashing eye onthe appropriate side.

3. Place the hook end of the strapthrough the loop and pull it untilthe strap is fastened securely tothe lashing eye.

268 Vehicle care

4. Insert the strap through thespokes of the wheel as shown inthe illustration.

5. Mount the hook to the rear lashingeye.

6. Tighten the strap and secure itusing the buckle.

9 Danger

Always drive with folded up andengaged rear seat backrests whenstowing a damaged full size wheelin the load compartment.

Stowing a damaged full sizewheel in the load compartment,Sports TourerAll permitted wheel sizes can bestowed in the spare wheel well. Tosecure the wheel:

1. Remove centre cap with the brandemblem by pushing from theinside.

2. Position the wheel outside downin the wheel well.

3. Secure the defective wheel withthe wing nut.

4. Depending on the tyre size, thefloor cover can be placed on theprojecting wheel.

Temporary spare wheel

Caution

The use of a spare wheel that issmaller than the other wheels or incombination with winter tyrescould affect driveability. Have thedefective tyre replaced as soon aspossible.

Only mount one temporary sparewheel. Do not drive faster than80 km/h. Take curves slowly. Do notuse for a long period of time.If your vehicle gets a flat tyre on therear while towing another vehicle,mount the temporary spare wheel inthe front and the full tyre in the rear.Tyre chains 3 260.

Vehicle care 269

Spare wheel with directional tyreIf possible, fit directional tyres suchthat they roll in the direction of travel.The rolling direction is indicated by asymbol (e.g. an arrow) on thesidewall.The following applies to tyres fittedopposing the rolling direction:● Driveability may be affected.

Have the defective tyre renewedor repaired as soon as possibleand fit it instead of the sparewheel.

● Drive particularly carefully on wetand snow-covered roadsurfaces.

Jump startingThe vehicle battery is located in theload compartment under a cover.There are connecting points for jumpstarting in the engine compartment.A vehicle with a discharged vehiclebattery can be started using jumpleads and the vehicle battery ofanother vehicle.Do not start with quick charger.

9 Warning

Be extremely careful when startingwith jump leads. Any deviationfrom the following instructions canlead to injuries or damage causedby battery explosion or damage tothe electrical systems of bothvehicles.

9 Warning

Avoid contact of the battery witheyes, skin, fabrics and paintedsurfaces. The fluid contains

sulphuric acid which can causeinjuries and damage in the eventof direct contact.

● Never expose the vehicle batteryto naked flames or sparks.

● A discharged vehicle battery canalready freeze at a temperatureof 0 °C. Defrost the frozen vehiclebattery before connecting jumpleads.

● Wear eye protection andprotective clothing whenhandling a vehicle battery.

● Use a booster vehicle batterywith the same voltage (12 Volt).Its capacity (Ah) must not bemuch less than that of thedischarged vehicle battery.

● Use jump leads with insulatedterminals and a cross section ofat least 16 mm2 (25 mm2 fordiesel engines).

● Do not disconnect the dischargedvehicle battery from the vehicle.

● Switch off all unnecessaryelectrical consumers.

270 Vehicle care

● Do not lean over the vehiclebattery during jump starting.

● Do not allow the terminals of onelead to touch those of the otherlead.

● The vehicles must not come intocontact with each other duringthe jump starting process.

● Apply the parking brake,transmission in neutral,automatic transmission in P.

● Open the positive terminalprotection cap of your vehicle inthe engine compartment and ofthe booster vehicle battery.

Lead connection order:1. Connect the red lead to the

positive terminal of the boostervehicle battery.

2. Connect the other end of the redlead to the positive terminal ofyour vehicle near the fuse box inthe engine compartment.

3. Connect the black lead to thenegative terminal of the boostervehicle battery.

4. Connect the other end of the blacklead to a vehicle grounding pointof your vehicle in the enginecompartment.

Route the leads so that they cannotcatch on rotating parts in the enginecompartment.To start the engine:1. Start the engine of the vehicle

providing the jump.2. After five minutes, start the other

engine. Start attempts should bemade for no longer than15 seconds at an interval of oneminute.

3. Allow both engines to idle forapprox. three minutes with theleads connected.

4. Switch on electrical consumers(e.g. headlights, heated rearwindow) of the vehicle receivingthe jump start.

5. Reverse above sequence exactlywhen removing leads.

Vehicle care 271

TowingTowing the vehicle

Insert a screwdriver in the slot at thelower part of the cap. Release the capby carefully moving the screwdriverdownwards.The towing eye is stowed with thevehicle tools 3 252.

Screw in the towing eye as far as it willgo until it stops in a horizontalposition.Attach a tow rope – or better still a towrod – to the towing eye.The towing eye must only be used fortowing and not for recovering thevehicle.Switch on ignition to release steeringwheel lock and to permit operation ofbrake lights, horn and windscreenwiper.Switch the selector lever to neutral.Release the parking brake.

Caution

Drive slowly. Do not drive jerkily.Excessive tractive force candamage the vehicle.

When the engine is not running,considerably more force is needed tobrake and steer.To prevent the entry of exhaust gasesfrom the towing vehicle, switch on theair recirculation and close thewindows.Vehicles with automatic transmission:The vehicle must be towed facingforwards, not faster than 80 km/h norfurther than 100 km. In all other casesand when the transmission isdefective, the front axle must beraised off the ground.Vehicles with manual transmissionautomated: the vehicle must only betowed facing forwards with the frontaxle raised off the ground.Seek the assistance of a workshop.After towing, unscrew the towing eye.Insert cap at the top and engagedownwards.

272 Vehicle care

Towing another vehicle

Insert a screwdriver in the slot at thelower bend of the cap. Release thecap by carefully moving thescrewdriver downwards.The towing eye is stowed with thevehicle tools 3 252.

Screw in the towing eye as far as it willgo until it stops in a horizontalposition.The lashing eye at the rearunderneath the vehicle must never beused as a towing eye.Attach a tow rope – or even better atow bar – to the towing eye.The towing eye must only be used fortowing and not for recovering avehicle.

Caution

Drive slowly. Do not drive jerkily.Excessive tractive force candamage the vehicle.

After towing, unscrew the towing eye.Insert cap at the top and engagedownwards.

Vehicle care 273

Appearance careExterior careLocksThe locks are lubricated at the factoryusing a high quality lock cylindergrease. Use de-icing agent only whenabsolutely necessary, as this has adegreasing effect and impairs lockfunction. After using a de-icing agent,have the locks regreased by aworkshop.

WashingThe paintwork of your vehicle isexposed to environmental influences.Wash and wax your vehicle regularly.When using automatic vehiclewashes, select a programme thatincludes waxing.Bird droppings, dead insects, resin,pollen and the like should be cleanedoff immediately, as they containaggressive constituents which cancause paint damage.

If using a vehicle wash, comply withthe vehicle wash manufacturer'sinstructions. The windscreen wiperand rear window wiper must beswitched off. Remove antenna andexternal accessories such as roofracks etc.If you wash your vehicle by hand,make sure that the insides of thewheel housings are also thoroughlyrinsed out.Clean edges and folds on openeddoors and the bonnet as well as theareas they cover.Clean bright metal mouldings with acleaning solution approved foraluminium to avoid damages.

Caution

Always use a cleaning agent witha pH value of four to nine.Do not use cleaning agents on hotsurfaces.

Do not clean the engine compartmentwith a steam-jet or high-pressure jetcleaner.

Thoroughly rinse and leather-off thevehicle. Rinse leather frequently. Useseparate leathers for painted andglass surfaces: remnants of wax onthe windows will impair vision.Have the door hinges of all doorsgreased by a workshop.Do not use hard objects to removespots of tar. Use tar removal spray onpainted surfaces.

Exterior lightsHeadlight and other light covers aremade of plastic. Do not use anyabrasive or caustic agents, do not usean ice scraper, and do not clean themdry.

Polishing and waxingWax the vehicle regularly (at thelatest when water no longer beads).Otherwise, the paintwork will dry out.Polishing is necessary only if the painthas become dull or if solid depositshave become attached to it.Paintwork polish with silicone forms aprotective film, making waxingunnecessary.

274 Vehicle care

Plastic body parts must not be treatedwith wax or polishing agents.

Windows and windscreen wiperbladesUse a soft lint-free cloth or chamoisleather together with window cleanerand insect remover.When cleaning the rear window frominside, always wipe in parallel to theheating element to prevent damage.For mechanical removal of ice, use asharp-edged ice scraper. Press thescraper firmly against the glass sothat no dirt can get under it andscratch the glass.Remove dirt residues from smearingwiper blades by using a soft cloth andwindow cleaner. Also make sure toremove any residues such as wax,insect residues and similar from thewindow.Ice residues, pollution and continuouswiping on dry windows will damage oreven destroy the wiper blades.

SunroofNever clean with solvents or abrasiveagents, fuels, aggressive media(e.g. paint cleaner, acetone-containing solutions etc.), acidic orhighly alkaline media or abrasivepads. Do not apply wax or polishingagents to the sunroof.

Wheels and tyresDo not use high-pressure jetcleaners.Clean rims with a pH-neutral wheelcleaner.Rims are painted and can be treatedwith the same agents as the body.

Paintwork damageRectify minor paintwork damage witha touch-up pen before rust forms.Have more extensive damage or rustareas repaired by a workshop.

UnderbodySome areas of the vehicle underbodyhave a PVC undercoating while othercritical areas have a durableprotective wax coating.

After the underbody is washed, checkthe underbody and have it waxed ifnecessary.Bitumen/rubber materials coulddamage the PVC coating. Haveunderbody work carried out by aworkshop.Before and after winter, wash theunderbody and have the protectivewax coating checked.

Towing equipmentDo not clean the coupling ball bar witha steam-jet or high-pressure jetcleaner.

Air shutterClean the shutter system in the frontbumper to maintain correctfunctionality.

Interior careInterior and upholsteryOnly clean the vehicle interior,including the instrument panel fasciaand panelling, with a dry cloth orinterior cleaner.

Vehicle care 275

Clean the leather upholstery withclear water and a soft cloth. In case ofheavy soiling, use leather care.The instrument cluster and thedisplays should only be cleaned usinga soft damp cloth. If necessary use aweak soap solution.Clean fabric upholstery with avacuum cleaner and brush. Removestains with an upholstery cleaner.Clothing fabrics may not becolourfast. This could cause visiblediscolourations, especially on light-coloured upholstery. Removablestains and discolourations should becleaned as soon as possible.Clean seat belts with lukewarm wateror interior cleaner.

Caution

Close Velcro fasteners as openVelcro fasteners on clothing coulddamage seat upholstery.The same applies to clothing withsharp-edged objects, like zips orbelts or studded jeans.

Plastic and rubber partsPlastic and rubber parts can becleaned with the same cleaner asused to clean the body. Use interiorcleaner if necessary. Do not use anyother agent. Avoid solvents and petrolin particular. Do not use high-pressure jet cleaners.

276 Service and maintenance

Service andmaintenance

General information ................... 276Service information .................. 276

Recommended fluids, lubricantsand parts .................................... 277

Recommended fluids andlubricants ................................ 277

General informationService informationIn order to ensure economical andsafe vehicle operation and tomaintain the value of your vehicle, itis of vital importance that allmaintenance work is carried out at theproper intervals as specified.The detailed, up-to-date serviceschedule for your vehicle is availableat the workshop.Service display 3 108.

European service intervalsMaintenance of your vehicle isrequired every 30,000 km or after oneyear, whichever occurs first, unlessotherwise indicated in the servicedisplay.A shorter service interval can be validfor severe driving behaviour, e.g. fortaxis and police vehicles.The European service intervals arevalid for the following countries:

Andorra, Austria, Belgium, Bosnia-Herzegovina, Bulgaria, Croatia,Cyprus, Czech Republic, Denmark,Estonia, Finland, France, Germany,Greece, Greenland, Hungary,Iceland, Ireland, Italy, Latvia,Liechtenstein, Lithuania,Luxembourg, Macedonia, Malta,Monaco, Montenegro, Netherlands,Norway, Poland, Portugal, Romania,San Marino, Serbia, Slovakia,Slovenia, Spain, Sweden,Switzerland, United Kingdom.Service display 3 108.

International service intervalsMaintenance of your vehicle isrequired every 15,000 km or after oneyear, whichever occurs first, unlessotherwise indicated in the servicedisplay.Severe operating conditions exist ifone or more of the followingcircumstances occur frequently: Coldstarting, stop and go operation, traileroperation, mountain driving, drivingon poor and sandy road surfaces,increased air pollution, presence ofairborne sand and high dust content,

Service and maintenance 277

driving at high altitude and largevariations of temperature. Underthese severe operating conditions,certain service work may be requiredmore frequently than the regularservice interval.The international service intervals arevalid for the countries which are notlisted in the European serviceintervals.Service display 3 108.

ConfirmationsConfirmation of service is recorded inthe Service and warranty booklet.The date and mileage is completedwith the stamp and signature of theservicing workshop.Make sure that the Service andwarranty booklet is completedcorrectly as continuous proof ofservice is essential if any warranty orgoodwill claims are to be met, and isalso a benefit when selling thevehicle.

Service interval with remainingengine oil life durationThe service interval is based onseveral parameters depending onusage.The service display lets you knowwhen to change the engine oil.Service display 3 108.

Recommended fluids,lubricants and partsRecommended fluids andlubricantsOnly use products that meet therecommended specifications.

9 Warning

Operating materials arehazardous and could bepoisonous. Handle with care. Payattention to information given onthe containers.

Engine oilEngine oil is identified by its qualityand its viscosity. Quality is moreimportant than viscosity whenselecting which engine oil to use. Theoil quality ensures e.g. enginecleanliness, wear protection and oilaging control, whereas viscositygrade gives information on the oil'sthickness over a temperature range.

278 Service and maintenance

Dexos is the newest engine oil qualitythat provides optimum protection forgasoline and diesel engines. If it isunavailable, engine oils of other listedqualities have to be used.Recommendations for gasolineengines are also valid forCompressed Natural Gas (CNG),Liquified Petroleum Gas (LPG) andEthanol (E85) fuelled engines.Select the appropriate engine oilbased on its quality and on theminimum ambient temperature3 282.

Topping up engine oil

Caution

In case of any spilled oil, wipe it upand dispose it properly.

Engine oils of different manufacturersand brands can be mixed as long asthey comply with the required engineoil quality and viscosity.

Use of engine oils for all petrolengines with only ACEA quality isprohibited, since it can cause enginedamage under certain operatingconditions.Select the appropriate engine oilbased on its quality and on theminimum ambient temperature3 282.

Additional engine oil additivesThe use of additional engine oiladditives could cause damage andinvalidate the warranty.

Engine oil viscosity gradesThe SAE viscosity grade givesinformation of the thickness of the oil.Multigrade oil is indicated by twofigures, e.g. SAE 5W-30. The firstfigure, followed by a W, indicates thelow temperature viscosity and thesecond figure the high temperatureviscosity.Select the appropriate viscosity gradedepending on the minimum ambienttemperature 3 282.

All of the recommended viscositygrades are suitable for high ambienttemperatures.

Coolant and antifreezeUse only organic acid type-long lifecoolant (LLC) antifreeze approved forthe vehicle. Consult a workshop.The system is factory filled withcoolant designed for excellentcorrosion protection and frostprotection down to approx. -28 °C. Innorthern countries with very lowtemperatures the factory filled coolantprovides frost protection down toapprox. -37 °C. This concentrationshould be maintained all year round.The use of additional coolantadditives that intend to give additionalcorrosion protection or seal againstminor leaks can cause functionproblems. Liability for consequencesresulting from the use of additionalcoolant additives will be rejected.

Service and maintenance 279

Washer fluidUse only washer fluid approved forthe vehicle to prevent damage ofwiper blades, paintwork, plastic andrubber parts. Consult a workshop.

Brake and clutch fluidOver time, brake fluid absorbsmoisture which will reduce brakingeffectiveness. The brake fluid shouldtherefore be replaced at the specifiedinterval.

280 Technical data

Technical data

Vehicle identification .................. 280Vehicle Identification Number .. 280Identification plate ................... 280Engine identification ................ 281

Vehicle data ............................... 282Recommended fluids andlubricants ................................ 282

Engine data ............................. 285Performance ............................ 287Vehicle weight ......................... 289Vehicle dimensions ................. 291Capacities ................................ 292Tyre pressures ........................ 293

Vehicle identificationVehicle IdentificationNumber

The Vehicle Identification Numbermay be stamped on the identificationplate and on the floor pan, under thefloor covering, visible under a cover.The Vehicle Identification Numbermay be embossed on the instrumentpanel, visible through the windscreen,or in the engine compartment on theright body panel.

Identification plate

The identification plate is located onthe front left or right door frame.

Technical data 281

Information on identification label:1 : manufacturer2 : operating permit number3 : vehicle identification number4 : permissible gross vehicle weight

rating in kg5 : permissible gross train weight

in kg6 : maximum permissible front axle

load in kg7 : maximum permissible rear axle

load in kg8 : vehicle-specific or country-

specific data

The combined total of front and rearaxle loads must not exceed thepermissible gross vehicle weight. Forexample, if the front axle is bearing itsmaximum permissible load, the rearaxle can only bear a load that is equalto the gross vehicle weight minus thefront axle load.The technical data is determined inaccordance with EuropeanCommunity standards. We reservethe right to make modifications.Specifications in the vehicledocuments always have priority overthose given in this manual.

Engine identificationThe technical data tables show theengine identifier code. Engine data3 285.To identify the respective engine,refer to the engine power in the EECCertificate of Conformity providedwith your vehicle or other nationalregistration documents.

282 Technical data

Vehicle dataRecommended fluids and lubricantsEuropean service schedule

Required engine oil qualityAll European countries with European service interval 3 276

Engine oil quality Petrol engines(including CNG, LPG, E85)

Diesel engines

dexos1 Gen2 ✔ –

dexos2 – ✔

Diesel engines only: In case dexos quality is unavailable, you may use max. one litre engine oil quality ACEA C3 oncebetween each oil change.

Engine oil viscosity gradesAll European countries with European service interval 3 276

Ambient temperature Petrol and diesel engines

down to -25 °C SAE 0W-30 or SAE 0W-40

SAE 5W-30 or SAE 5W-40

below -25 °C SAE 0W-30 or SAE 0W-40

Technical data 283

International service schedule

Required engine oil qualityAll countries with international service interval 3 276


Diesel engines

dexos1 Gen2 ✔ –

dexos2 – ✔

In case dexos quality is unavailable you may use the oil qualities listed below:

All countries with international service interval 3 276


Diesel engines

ACEA A3/B4 – ✔

ACEA C3 – ✔

Engine oil viscosity gradesAll countries with international service interval 3 276

Ambient temperature Petrol and diesel engines

down to -25 °C SAE 0W-30 or SAE 0W-40

SAE 5W-30 or SAE 5W-40

284 Technical data

All countries with international service interval 3 276

below -25 °C SAE 0W-30 or SAE 0W-40

down to -20 °C SAE 10W-301) or SAE 10W-401)

1) Permitted, but usage of oil with dexos quality is recommended.

Technical data 285

Engine dataEngine identifier code B10XFL B14XE B14XFL B14XFT B14XNT B16SHTSales designation 1.0 1.4 1.4 1.4 1.4 CNG 1.6Engineering code B10XFT B14XE B14XFT B14XFT B14XNT B16SHT

Piston displacement [cm3] 999 1399 1399 1399 1399 1598

Engine power [kW] 77 74 92 110 81 147

at rpm 4500-6000 6000 4000-5600 5000-5600 5600 5500

Torque [Nm] 170 130 245/2302) 245/2302) 200 280

at rpm 1800-4300 4300 2000-3500 2000-4000 2000-3600 1650-5000

Fuel type Petrol Petrol Petrol Petrol Natural gas/Petrol Petrol

Octane rating RON3)

recommended 95 95 95 95 95 98

possible 98 98 98 98 98 95

possible 91 91 91 91 91 91

Additional fuel type – – – – Natural gas (CNG) –

2) With Stop-start system.3) A country-specific label at the fuel filler flap can supersede the engine-specific requirement.

286 Technical data

Engine identifier code B16DTC B16DTE B16DTU B16DTHB16DTRSales designation 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.61.6Engineering code B16DTE B16DTE B16DTU B16DTHB16DTR

Piston displacement [cm3] 1598 1598 1598 15981598

Engine power [kW] 70 81 81 100118

at rpm 3500 3500 3500 3500-40004000

Torque [Nm] 280 300 300 320350

at rpm 1500-1750 1750-2000 1750-2000 2000-22501500-2250

Fuel type Diesel Diesel Diesel DieselDiesel

Technical data 287

Performance5-door Hatchback

Engine B10XFL B14XE B14XFL B14XFTB14XNTCNG B16SHT

Maximum speed [km/h]

Manual transmission 195 185 205 215 4) 235

Manual transmission automated 200 – – – – –

Automatic transmission – – – 210 – 235

4) Value was not available at time of printing.

Engine B16DTC B16DTE B16DTU B16DTH B16DTR


Manual transmission 185 195 200 205 220

Manual transmission automated – – – – –

Automatic transmission – – – 200 –

288 Technical data

Sports Tourer

Engine B10XFL B14XE B14XFL B14XFTB14XNTCNG B16SHT


Manual transmission 195 185 205 215 4) 235

Manual transmission automated 200 – – – – –

Automatic transmission – – – 210 – 235


Engine B16DTC B16DTE B16DTU B16DTH B16DTR


Manual transmission 185 195 195 205 220

Manual transmission automated – – – – –

Automatic transmission – – – 200 –

Technical data 289

Vehicle weightKerb weight, basic model without any optional equipment

5-door Hatchback Engine Manualtransmission

Manual transmissionautomated

Automatictransmission

without/withair conditioning[kg]

B10XFL 1263/1273 1263/1273 –

B14XE 1234/1244 – –

B14XFL 1268/1278 – –

B14XFT 1268/1278 – –/1308

B14XNTCNG

5) – –

B16SHT –/1350 – –/1378

B16DTC 1335/1345 – –

B16DTE 1350/1360 – –

B16DTU 1335/1345 – –

B16DTH 1350/1360 – 1354/1364

B16DTR 1396/1406 – –


Optional equipment and accessories increase the kerb weight.Loading information 3 88.

290 Technical data

Kerb weight, basic model without any optional equipment

Sports Tourer Engine Manual transmission Manual transmission automated Automatic transmission

without/with air conditioning[kg]

B10XFL 1278/1288 1278/1288 –

B14XE 1263/1273 – –

B14XFL –/1322 – –

B14XFT 1312/1322 – 1340/1350

B14XNTCNG

5) – –

B16SHT –/1393 – –

B16DTC 1378/1388 – –

B16DTE 1393/1403 – –

B16DTU 1393/1403 – –

B16DTH 1393/1403 – 1415/1425

B16DTR 1393/1411 – 1425/1443


Optional equipment and accessories increase the kerb weight.Loading information 3 88.

Technical data 291

Vehicle dimensions5-door hatchback Sports Tourer

Length [mm] 4370-4386 4702

Width without exterior mirrors [mm] 1809 1809

Width with two exterior mirrors [mm] 2042 2042

Height (without antenna) [mm] 1437-1531 1452-1580

Length of load compartment floor [mm] 828 1065

Length of load compartment with folded rear seats [mm] 1575 1872

Load compartment width [mm] 1001 1050

Load compartment height [mm] 600 747

Wheelbase [mm] 2662 2662

Turning circle diameter [m] 11.05-11.44 11.05-11.44

292 Technical data

CapacitiesEngine oil

Engine B10XFL B14XFL,B14XFT,B14XE

B14XNTCNG

B16DTU B16DTC,B16DTE,B16DTH,B16DTR

B16SHT

including Filter [l] 4.0 4.0 6) 4.5 5.0 5.5

between MIN and MAX [l] 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0


Fuel tank

Petrol/diesel, refilling quantity [l] 48

Natural gas CNG, refilling quantity [kg] or [l]7)

Petrol, refilling quantity [l]19 or approx. 11714

7) Value refers to test gas G20 (99 to 100% methane) at 20 MPa/200 bar/2900 psi and 15 °C.

Technical data 293

Tyre pressures5-door hatchback Comfort with up to 3 people ECO with up to 3 people With full loadEngine Tyres front rear front rear front rear

[kPa/bar]([psi])

[kPa/bar]([psi])

[kPa/bar]([psi])

[kPa/bar]([psi])

[kPa/bar]([psi])

[kPa/bar]([psi])

B10XFL,B14XE

195/65 R15,225/45 R17

220/2.2 (32) 220/2.2 (32) 270/2.7 (39) 270/2.7 (39) 250/2.5 (36) 270/2.7 (39)

205/55 R16 220/2.2 (32) 220/2.2 (32) 300/3.0 (43) 300/3.0 (43) 250/2.5 (36) 270/2.7 (39)

B14XFL 195/65 R15,225/45 R17,225/40 R18

220/2.2 (32) 220/2.2 (32) 270/2.7 (39) 270/2.7 (39) 250/2.5 (36) 270/2.7 (39)

205/55 R16 220/2.2 (32) 220/2.2 (32) 300/3.0 (43) 300/3.0 (43) 250/2.5 (36) 270/2.7 (39)

B14XFT 195/65 R15,225/45 R17,215/55 R16,215/50 R17,225/40 R18

220/2.2 (32) 220/2.2 (32) 270/2.7 (39) 270/2.7 (39) 250/2.5 (36) 270/2.7 (39)

205/55 R16 220/2.2 (32) 220/2.2 (32) 300/3.0 (43) 300/3.0 (43) 250/2.5 (36) 270/2.7 (39)

B14XNTCNG

215/55 R16,215/50 R17

240/2.4 (35) 240/2.4 (35) 270/2.7 (39) 270/2.7 (39) 250/2.5 (36) 300/3.0 (43)

294 Technical data

5-door hatchback Comfort with up to 3 people ECO with up to 3 people With full loadEngine Tyres front rear front rear front rear

[kPa/bar]([psi])

[kPa/bar]([psi])

[kPa/bar]([psi])

[kPa/bar]([psi])

[kPa/bar]([psi])

[kPa/bar]([psi])

B16DTE 195/65 R15,225/45 R17,225/40 R18

240/2.4 (35) 220/2.2 (32) 270/2.7 (39) 270/2.7 (39) 250/2.5 (36) 270/2.7 (39)

205/55 R16 240/2.4 (35) 220/2.2 (32) 300/3.0 (43) 300/3.0 (43) 250/2.5 (36) 270/2.7 (39)

B16DTH 225/45 R17,225/40 R18

240/2.4 (35) 220/2.2 (32) 270/2.7 (39) 270/2.7 (39) 250/2.5 (36) 270/2.7 (39)

205/55 R16 240/2.4 (35) 220/2.2 (32) 300/3.0 (43) 300/3.0 (43) 250/2.5 (36) 270/2.7 (39)

B16DTR,B16SHT

225/45 R17 240/2.4 (35) 220/2.2 (32) 270/2.7 (39) 270/2.7 (39) 250/2.5 (36) 270/2.7 (39)

225/40 R18 260/2.6 (38) 240/2.4 (35) 270/2.7 (39) 270/2.7 (39) 270/2.7 (39) 290/2.9 (42)

205/55 R16 240/2.4 (35) 220/2.2 (32) 300/3.0 (43) 300/3.0 (43) 250/2.5 (36) 270/2.7 (39)

B16DTC,B16DTU

195/65 R15,225/45 R17

240/2.4 (35) 220/2.2 (32) 270/2.7 (39) 270/2.7 (39) 250/2.5 (36) 270/2.7 (39)

205/55 R16 240/2.4 (35) 220/2.2 (32) 300/3.0 (43) 300/3.0 (43) 250/2.5 (36) 270/2.7 (39)

All Temporary spare wheel115/70 R16

420/4.2 (60) 420/4.2 (60) – – 420/4.2 (60) 420/4.2 (60)

Technical data 295

Sports Tourer Comfort with up to 3 people ECO with up to 3 people With full loadEngine Tyres front rear front rear front rear

[kPa/bar]([psi])

[kPa/bar]([psi])

[kPa/bar]([psi])

[kPa/bar]([psi])

[kPa/bar]([psi])

[kPa/bar]([psi])

B10XFL,B14XE

195/65 R15,225/45 R17

220/2.2 (32) 220/2.2 (32) 270/2.7 (39) 270/2.7 (39) 250/2.5 (36) 270/2.7 (39)

205/55 R16 220/2.2 (32) 220/2.2 (32) 300/3.0 (43) 300/3.0 (43) 250/2.5 (36) 270/2.7 (39)

B14XFL 195/65 R15,225/45 R17,225/40 R18

220/2.2 (32) 220/2.2 (32) 270/2.7 (39) 270/2.7 (39) 250/2.5 (36) 270/2.7 (39)

205/55 R16 220/2.2 (32) 220/2.2 (32) 300/3.0 (43) 300/3.0 (43) 250/2.5 (36) 270/2.7 (39)

B14XFT 195/65 R15,225/45 R17,225/40 R18

220/2.2 (32) 220/2.2 (32) 270/2.7 (39) 270/2.7 (39) 250/2.5 (36) 270/2.7 (39)

205/55 R16 220/2.2 (32) 220/2.2 (32) 300/3.0 (43) 300/3.0 (43) 250/2.5 (36) 270/2.7 (39)

B14XNTCNG

215/55 R16,215/50 R17

240/2.4 (35) 240/2.4 (35) 270/2.7 (39) 270/2.7 (39) 250/2.5 (36) 300/3.0 (43)

296 Technical data

Sports Tourer Comfort with up to 3 people ECO with up to 3 people With full loadEngine Tyres front rear front rear front rear

[kPa/bar]([psi])

[kPa/bar]([psi])

[kPa/bar]([psi])

[kPa/bar]([psi])

[kPa/bar]([psi])

[kPa/bar]([psi])

B16DTE 195/65 R15,225/45 R17,225/40 R18

240/2.4 (35) 220/2.2 (32) 270/2.7 (39) 270/2.7 (39) 250/2.5 (36) 270/2.7 (39)

205/55 R16 240/2.4 (35) 220/2.2 (32) 300/3.0 (43) 300/3.0 (43) 250/2.5 (36) 270/2.7 (39)

B16DTH 225/45 R17,225/40 R18

240/2.4 (35) 220/2.2 (32) 270/2.7 (39) 270/2.7 (39) 250/2.5 (36) 270/2.7 (39)

205/55 R16 240/2.4 (35) 220/2.2 (32) 300/3.0 (43) 300/3.0 (43) 250/2.5 (36) 270/2.7 (39)

B16DTR,B16SHT

225/45 R17 240/2.4 (35) 220/2.2 (32) 270/2.7 (39) 270/2.7 (39) 250/2.5 (36) 290/2.9 (42)

225/40 R18 260/2.6 (38) 240/2.4 (35) 270/2.7 (39) 270/2.7 (39) 270/2.7 (39) 300/3.0 (43)

205/55 R16 240/2.4 (35) 220/2.2 (32) 300/3.0 (43) 300/3.0 (43) 250/2.5 (36) 290/2.9 (42)

B16DTC,B16DTU

195/65 R15,225/45 R17

240/2.4 (35) 220/2.2 (32) 270/2.7 (39) 270/2.7 (39) 250/2.5 (36) 270/2.7 (39)

205/55 R16 240/2.4 (35) 220/2.2 (32) 300/3.0 (43) 300/3.0 (43) 250/2.5 (36) 270/2.7 (39)

All Temporary sparewheel115/70 R16

420/4.2 (60) 420/4.2 (60) – – 420/4.2 (60) 420/4.2 (60)

Customer information 297

Customerinformation

Customer information ................ 297Declaration of conformity ......... 297REACH .................................... 301Collision damage repair ........... 301Software acknowledgement .... 301Software update ...................... 303Registered trademarks ............ 304

Vehicle data recording and pri‐vacy ........................................... 304

Event data recorders ............... 304Radio Frequency Identification(RFID) ..................................... 305

Customer informationDeclaration of conformityRadio transmission systemsThis vehicle has systems thattransmit and/or receive radio wavessubject to Directive 1999/5/EC or2014/53/EU. These systems are incompliance with the essentialrequirements and other relevantprovisions of Directive 1999/5/EC or2014/53/EU. Copies of the originalDeclarations of Conformity can beobtained on our website.

AntennaLaird8100 Industrial Park Drive, GrandBlanc, MI, 48439, USAOperation frequency: N/AMaximum output: N/AKathrein Automotive North America,Inc.3967 W. Hamlin Rd., Rochester Hills,MI 48309, USAOperation frequency: N/A

Maximum output: N/A

Electronic keyDenso CoperationWaldeckerstraße 11, 64546Mörfelden-Walldorf, GermanyOperation frequency: 433,92 MHzMaximum output: -5,88 dBm

Electronic key moduleDenso CoperationWaldeckerstraße 11, 64546Mörfelden-Walldorf, GermanyOperation frequency: 125 kHzMaximum output: -0,14 dBm

Front radar unitContinental Automotive GmbHADC Automotive Distance ControlSystems GmbH, Peter-Dornier-Straße 10, 88131 Lindau, GermanyOperation frequency: 76-77 GHzMaximum output: 30 EIRP dBm

ImmobiliserBoschRobert Bosch GmbH, Robert BoschPlatz 1, 70839 Gerlingen, Germany

298 Customer information

Operation frequency: 125 kHzMaximum output:4.9 dBµA/m @ 10 m

Infotainment system R 4.0LGELG Electronics European SharedService Center B.V., Krijgsman 1,1186 DM Amstelveen, TheNetherlands

Operationfrequency (MHz)

Maximum output(dBm)

2402.0 - 2480.0 4

2400.0 - 2483.5 13

5725.0 - 5850.0 13

Infotainment system R300 BTHumax Automotive Co. Ltd.2, Yeongmun-ro, Cheoin-gu, Yong-in-si, Gyeonggi-do, KoreaOperation frequency:2402 - 2480 MHzMaximum output: 4 dBm

OnStar moduleLGE

LG Electronics European SharedService Center B.V., Krijgsman 1,1186 DM Amstelveen, TheNetherlands


Maximum output(dBm)

2402 - 2480 4

2412 - 2462 18

880 - 915 33

1710 - 1785 24

1850 - 1910 24

1920 - 1980 24

2500 - 2570 23

Infotainment system Navi 900IntelliLinkBoschRobert Bosch Car Multimedia GmbH,Robert-Bosch-Straße 200, 31139Hildesheim, Germany


Maximum output(mW)

2402 - 2480 10

2400 - 2480 100

Infotainment system Navi 900 TunerDelphiDelphi Deutschland GmbH, 42367Wuppertal, GermanyOperation frequency: N/AMaximum output: N/A

Parking heater remote conrtolreceiverWebasto Thermo & Comfort SEFriedrichshafener Straße 9, 82205Gilching, GermanyOperation frequency: N/AMaximum output: N/A

Parking heater remote conrtoltransmitterWebasto Thermo & Comfort SEFriedrichshafener Straße 9, 82205Gilching, GermanyOperation frequency: 869,0 MHz


Maximum output: 14 dBm

Radio remote control receiverRobert Bosch GmbHRobert Bosch Platz 1, 70839Gerlingen, GermanyOperation frequency: 433.92 MHzMaximum output: N/A

Radio remote control transmitterRobert Bosch GmbHRobert Bosch Platz 1, 70839Gerlingen, GermanyOperation frequency: 433.92 MHzMaximum output: -9 dbm

Tyre pressure sensorsSchrader Electronics Ltd.11 Technology Park, Belfast Road,Antrim BT41 1QS, Northern Ireland,United KingdomOperation frequency: 433.92 MHzMaximum output: 10 dBm


Jack


Translation of the original declarationof conformityDeclaration of conformity accordingto EC Directive 2006/42/ECWe declare that the product:Product designation: JackType/GM part number: 13512620is in compliance with the provisions ofDirective 2006/42/EC.Applied technical standards:GMN9737 : jackingGM 14337 : standard equipment

jack – hardwaretests

GMN5127 : vehicle integrity –hoisting and servicestation jacking

GMW15005 : standard equipmentjack and spare tyre,vehicle test

ISO TS 16949 : qualitymanagementsystems

The signatory is authorised tocompile the technical documentation.Rüsselsheim, 27th November 2015signed byAndré-Alexander KonterEngineering Group Manager Tyreand Wheel SystemsAdam Opel GmbHD-65423 Rüsselsheim

REACHRegistration, Evaluation,Authorisation and Restriction ofChemicals (REACH) is a EuropeanUnion regulation adopted to improvethe protection of human health andthe environment from the risks thatcan be posed by chemicals. Visitwww.opel.com/reach for furtherinformation and for access to theArticle 33 communication.

Collision damage repairPaint thicknessDue to production techniques, thethickness of the paint can varybetween 50 and 400 µm.Therefore, different paint thickness isno indicator for a collision damagerepair.

Software acknowledgementCertain OnStar components includelibcurl and unzip software and otherthird party software. Below are thenotices and licenses associated withlibcurl and unzip and for other thirdparty software please see http://www.lg.com/global/support/opensource/index.

libcurlCopyright and permission noticeCopyright (c) 1996 - 2010, DanielStenberg, <[email protected]>.All rights reserved.


Permission to use, copy, modify, anddistribute this software for anypurpose with or without fee is herebygranted, provided that the abovecopyright notice and this permissionnotice appear in all copies.The software is provided "as is",without warranty of any kind, expressor implied, including but not limited tothe warranties of merchantability,fitness for a particular purpose andnoninfringement of third party rights.In no event shall the authors orcopyright holders be liable for anyclaim, damages or other liability,whether in an action of contract, tortor otherwise, arising from, out of or inconnection with the software or theuse or other dealings in the software.Except as contained in this notice, thename of a copyright holder shall notbe used in advertising or otherwise topromote the sale, use or otherdealings in this Software without priorwritten authorization of the copyrightholder.

unzipThis is version 2005-Feb-10 of theInfo-ZIP copyright and license. Thedefinitive version of this documentshould be available at ftp://ftp.info-zip.org/pub/infozip/license.htmlindefinitely.Copyright (c) 1990-2005 Info-ZIP. Allrights reserved.For the purposes of this copyright andlicense, “Info-ZIP” is defined as thefollowing set of individuals:Mark Adler, John Bush, Karl Davis,Harald Denker, Jean-Michel Dubois,Jean-loup Gailly, Hunter Goatley, EdGordon, Ian Gorman, Chris Herborth,Dirk Haase, Greg Hartwig, RobertHeath, Jonathan Hudson, PaulKienitz, David Kirschbaum, JohnnyLee, Onno van der Linden, IgorMandrichenko, Steve P. Miller, SergioMonesi, Keith Owens, GeorgePetrov, Greg Roelofs, Kai UweRommel, Steve Salisbury, DaveSmith, Steven M. Schweda, ChristianSpieler, Cosmin Truta, AntoineVerheijen, Paul von Behren, RichWales, Mike White.

This software is provided “as is,”without warranty of any kind, expressor implied. In no event shall Info-ZIPor its contributors be held liable forany direct, indirect, incidental, specialor consequential damages arising outof the use of or inability to use thissoftware.Permission is granted to anyone touse this software for any purpose,including commercial applications,and to alter it and redistribute it freely,subject to the following restrictions:1. Redistributions of source code

must retain the above copyrightnotice, definition, disclaimer, andthis list of conditions.

2. Redistributions in binary form(compiled executables) mustreproduce the above copyrightnotice, definition, disclaimer, andthis list of conditions indocumentation and/or othermaterials provided with thedistribution. The sole exception tothis condition is redistribution of astandard UnZipSFX binary(including SFXWiz) as part of aself-extracting archive; that is


permitted without inclusion of thislicense, as long as the normalSFX banner has not beenremoved from the binary ordisabled.

3. Altered versions--including, butnot limited to, ports to newoperating systems, existing portswith new graphical interfaces, anddynamic, shared, or static libraryversions--must be plainly markedas such and must not bemisrepresented as being theoriginal source. Such alteredversions also must not bemisrepresented as being Info-ZIPreleases--including, but notlimited to, labeling of the alteredversions with the names “Info-ZIP” (or any variation thereof,including, but not limited to,different capitalizations), “PocketUnZip,” “WiZ” or “MacZip” withoutthe explicit permission of Info-ZIP.Such altered versions are furtherprohibited from misrepresentative

use of the Zip-Bugs or Info-ZIP e-mail addresses or of the Info-ZIPURL(s).

4. Info-ZIP retains the right to usethe names “Info-ZIP,” “Zip,”“UnZip,” “UnZipSFX,” “WiZ,”“Pocket UnZip,” “Pocket Zip,” and“MacZip” for its own source andbinary releases.

Software updateThe Infotainment system candownload and install selectedsoftware updates over a wirelessconnection.NoteThe availability of these over-the-airvehicle software updates varies byvehicle and country. Find moreinformation on our home page.

Internet connectionDownloading over-the-air vehiclesoftware updates requires internetconnectivity, which can be accessedthrough the vehicle’s built-in OnStar

connection or another password-protected Wi-Fi hotspot, e.g. providedby a mobile phone.To connect the Infotainment systemto a hotspot, select Settings on thehome screen, Wi-Fi and then ManageWi-Fi Networks. Select the desiredWi-Fi network, and follow the on-screen prompts.

UpdatesThe system will prompt for certainupdates to be downloaded andinstalled. There is also an option tocheck for updates manually.To manually check for updates, selectSettings on the home screen,Software Information and thenSystem Update. Follow the on-screenprompts.NoteSteps for downloading and installingupdates may vary by vehicle.NoteDuring the installation process, thevehicle may not be operational.


Registered trademarksApple Inc.Apple CarPlay™ is a trademark ofApple Inc.App Store® and iTunes Store® areregistered trademarks of Apple Inc.iPhone®, iPod®, iPod touch®, iPodnano®, iPad® and Siri® are registeredtrademarks of Apple Inc.Bluetooth SIG, Inc.Bluetooth® is a registered trademarkof Bluetooth SIG, Inc.DivX, LLCDivX® and DivX Certified® areregistered trademarks of DivX, LLC.EnGIS Technologies, Inc.BringGo® is a registered trademark ofEnGIS Technologies, Inc.Google Inc.Android™ and Google Play™ Storeare trademarks of Google Inc.Stitcher Inc.Stitcher™ is a trademark of Stitcher,Inc.

Verband der Automobilindustrie e.V.AdBlue® is a registered trademark ofthe VDA.

Vehicle data recordingand privacyEvent data recordersData storage modules in thevehicleA large number of electroniccomponents of your vehicle containdata storage modules temporarily orpermanently storing technical dataabout the condition of the vehicle,events and errors. In general, thistechnical information documents thecondition of parts, modules, systemsor the environment:● operating conditions of system

components (e.g. filling levels)● status messages of the vehicle

and its single components (e.g.number of wheel revolutions /rotational speed, deceleration,lateral acceleration)

● dysfunctions and defects inimportant system components


● vehicle reactions in particulardriving situations (e.g. inflation ofan airbag, activation of thestability regulation system)

● environmental conditions (e.g.temperature)

These data are exclusively technicaland help identifying and correctingerrors as well as optimising vehiclefunctions.Motion profiles indicating travelledroutes cannot be created with thesedata.If services are used (e.g. repairworks, service processes, warrantycases, quality assurance),employees of the service network(manufacturer included) are able toread out this technical informationfrom the event and error data storagemodules applying special diagnosticdevices. If required, you will receivefurther information at theseworkshops. After an error has beencorrected, the data are deleted fromthe error storage module or they areconstantly overwritten.

When using the vehicle, situationsmay occur in which these technicaldata related to other information(accident report, damages on thevehicle, witness statements etc.) maybe associated with a specific person -possibly, with the assistance of anexpert.Additional functions contractuallyagreed upon with the client (e.g.vehicle location in emergency cases)allow the transmission of particularvehicle data from the vehicle.

Radio FrequencyIdentification (RFID)RFID technology is used in somevehicles for functions such as tyrepressure monitoring and ignitionsystem security. It is also used inconnection with conveniences suchas radio remote controls for doorlocking/unlocking and starting, and in-vehicle transmitters for garage dooropeners. RFID technology in Opelvehicles does not use or recordpersonal information or link with anyother Opel system containingpersonal information.

306

Index AAccessories and vehicle

modifications .......................... 227Active emergency braking.......... 197Adaptive cruise control....... 114, 186Adjustable air vents ................... 155Airbag and belt tensioners ......... 110Airbag deactivation .............. 63, 110Airbag label................................... 58Airbag system .............................. 58Air conditioning regular

operation ................................ 156Air conditioning system .............. 148Air intake .................................... 156Air vents...................................... 155Antilock brake system ................ 176Antilock brake system (ABS) ..... 112Anti-theft alarm system ................ 36Anti-theft locking system .............. 36Appearance care........................ 273Armrest................................... 53, 55Armrest storage ........................... 72Ashtrays ....................................... 99Automatic anti-dazzle .................. 41Automatic light control ............... 137Automatic locking ........................ 29Automatic transmission ............. 169Autostop..................................... 163Auxiliary heater........................... 155

BBattery discharge protection ...... 146Battery voltage ........................... 124Belts.............................................. 56Bonnet ....................................... 229Brake and clutch fluid................. 277Brake and clutch system ........... 111Brake assist ............................... 179Brake fluid .................................. 232Brakes ............................... 176, 232Breakdown.................................. 271Bulb replacement ....................... 235

CCapacities .................................. 292Cargo management system ........ 82Catalytic converter ..................... 169Central locking system ................ 24Centre console lighting .............. 145Changing tyre and wheel size . . . 260Charging system ........................ 111Child locks ................................... 30Child restraint installation

locations ................................... 67Child restraints.............................. 65Child restraint systems ................ 65Climate control ............................. 16Climate control systems............. 147Clock............................................. 95CNG.................................... 106, 219

307

Collision damage repair.............. 301Control indicators........................ 109Control of the vehicle ................. 158Controls........................................ 91Convex shape .............................. 39Coolant and antifreeze............... 277Cruise control .................... 114, 182Cupholders .................................. 71Curtain airbag system .................. 63Curve lighting.............................. 138

DDanger, Warnings and Cautions . . . 4Daytime running lights ............... 138Declaration of conformity............ 297Diesel fuel system bleeding ....... 234Diesel particle filter .................... 168Door open .................................. 115Doors............................................ 30Driver assistance systems.......... 182Driver Information Centre........... 115Driving characteristics and

towing tips .............................. 222Driving hints................................ 158

EElectric adjustment ...................... 39Electrical system......................... 245Electric parking brake......... 111, 177Electric parking brake fault......... 111Electronic climate control system 150

Electronic driving programmes ......................................... 171, 176

Electronic key system................... 22Electronic Stability Control.......... 180Electronic Stability Control and

Traction Control system.......... 112Electronic Stability Control off..... 112End-of-life vehicle recovery ....... 228Engine compartment fuse box ... 246Engine coolant ........................... 231Engine coolant temperature

gauge ..................................... 107Engine data ............................... 285Engine exhaust .......................... 168Engine identification................... 281Engine oil ................... 230, 277, 282Engine oil pressure .................... 113Entry lighting .............................. 145Event data recorders.................. 304Exit lighting ................................ 145Exterior care .............................. 273Exterior light ............................... 114Exterior lighting .................... 13, 136Exterior mirrors............................. 39

FFault ................................... 171, 176First aid kit ................................... 87Fixed air vents ........................... 155Fog light ..................................... 114

Fog lights ................................... 237Folding mirrors ............................. 39Following distance...................... 112Following distance indication...... 196Forward collision alert................. 193Fragrance diffuser........................ 98Front airbag system ..................... 62Front fog lights ........................... 142Front seats.................................... 47Front storage................................ 72Fuel............................................. 217Fuel consumption - CO2-

Emissions ............................... 221Fuel for diesel engines .............. 218Fuel for natural gas operation . . . 219Fuel for petrol engines ............... 217Fuel gauge ................................. 106Fuel selector .............................. 106Fuses ......................................... 245

GGauges....................................... 104Gear shifting............................... 112General information ................... 222Glovebox ..................................... 71

HHalogen headlights .................... 235Hand brake......................... 176, 177Hazard warning flashers ............ 141Headlight flash ........................... 137

308

Headlight range adjustment ...... 137Headlights................................... 136Headlights when driving abroad 138Head restraint adjustment ............. 8Head restraints ............................ 46Heated mirrors ............................. 40Heated rear window ..................... 43Heated steering wheel ................. 92Heating .................................. 54, 56Heating and ventilation system . 147High beam ......................... 114, 137High beam assist........................ 114Hill start assist ........................... 179Horn ....................................... 14, 92

IIdentification plate ..................... 280Ignition switch positions ............. 158Immobiliser .......................... 38, 114Indicators.................................... 104Info display................................. 121Information displays.................... 115Instrument cluster ...................... 101Instrument panel fuse box ......... 248Instrument panel illumination ..... 245Instrument panel illumination

control .................................... 144Instrument panel overview ........... 10Interior care ............................... 274Interior lighting............................ 144

Interior lights ...................... 144, 245Interior mirrors.............................. 40Interruption of power supply ...... 172Introduction .................................... 3

JJump starting ............................. 269

KKey, memorised settings.............. 24Keys ............................................. 20Keys, locks................................... 20

LLane keep assist................ 112, 215Lashing eyes ............................... 81LED headlights................... 114, 138Lighting features......................... 145Light switch ................................ 136Load compartment ................ 30, 73Load compartment cover ............. 79Load compartment fuse box ...... 250Loading information ..................... 88Low fuel ..................................... 113

MMalfunction indicator light .......... 111Manual anti-dazzle ...................... 40Manual mode ..................... 171, 175Manual seat adjustment............... 48Manual transmission .................. 173

Manual transmission automated 173Manual windows .......................... 41Massage....................................... 55Maximum speed......................... 254Memorised settings...................... 24Midlevel display.......................... 115Mirror adjustment ........................... 9Misted light covers ..................... 143

NNatural gas......................... 106, 219New vehicle running-in .............. 158Number plate light ..................... 244

OObject detection systems........... 200Odometer ................................... 105Oil, engine.......................... 277, 282OnStar........................................ 131Outside temperature .................... 95Overrun cut-off ........................... 163

PParking ................................ 19, 166Parking assist ............................ 200Parking brake ............................ 177Parking lights ............................. 143Particulate filter........................... 168Performance .............................. 287Performing work ........................ 229Pollen filter ................................. 156

309

Power button.............................. 159Power connector........................... 98Power outlets ............................... 97Power seat adjustment ................ 50Power windows ............................ 41Preheating ................................. 113Puncture..................................... 264

QQuickheat................................... 155

RRadio Frequency Identification

(RFID)..................................... 305Radio remote control ................... 21REACH....................................... 301Reading lights ............................ 144Rear floor storage cover .............. 81Rear fog light ..................... 114, 143Rear seats.................................... 55Rear storage................................. 79Rear view camera ...................... 209Rear window wiper/washer .......... 94Recommended fluids and

lubricants ........................ 277, 282Refuelling ................................... 219Registered trademarks............... 304Retained power off..................... 160Reversing lights ......................... 143Ride control systems.................. 179Roof.............................................. 44

Roof load...................................... 88Roof rack ..................................... 88

SSafety belts................................... 56Safety net .................................... 84Seat adjustment ............................. 7Seat belt ........................................ 8Seat belt reminder ..................... 109Seat belts ..................................... 56Seat heating

Seat heating, front..................... 54Seat heating, rear..................... 56

Seat position ................................ 47Selector lever ..................... 170, 174Service ............................... 156, 276Service display .......................... 108Service information .................... 276Side airbag system ...................... 62Side blind spot alert.................... 207Sidelights.................................... 136Side turn signal lights ................ 244Software acknowledgement....... 301Software update......................... 303Spare wheel ............................... 266Speed limiter....................... 115, 184Speedometer ............................. 104Sport mode ................................ 182Starting and operating................ 158Starting off ................................... 17

Starting the engine .................... 161Steering...................................... 158Steering wheel adjustment ...... 9, 91Steering wheel controls ............... 91Stop-start system........................ 163Storage......................................... 71Storage compartments................. 71Sunroof ........................................ 44Sunvisor lights ........................... 145Sun visors .................................... 43Symbols ......................................... 4

TTachometer ............................... 106Tail lights ................................... 238Three-point seat belt .................... 57Tools .......................................... 252Tow bar....................................... 222Towing................................ 222, 271Towing another vehicle ............. 272Towing equipment ..................... 223Towing the vehicle ..................... 271Traction Control system ............. 179Traction Control system off......... 113Traffic sign assistant........... 115, 211Trailer coupling........................... 222Trailer stability assist ................. 226Trailer towing ............................. 223Transmission ............................... 16Transmission display ......... 169, 174

310

Tread depth ............................... 259Trip odometer ............................ 105Turn and lane-change signals ... 142Turn signal ................................. 109Tyre chains ................................ 260Tyre designations ...................... 254Tyre pressure ............................ 254Tyre pressure monitoring

system............................. 113, 255Tyre pressures ........................... 293Tyre repair kit ............................. 261

UUltrasonic parking assist............. 200Upholstery.................................. 274Uplevel display........................... 115Using this manual .......................... 3

VValet mode................................. 121Vehicle battery ........................... 233Vehicle checks............................ 229Vehicle data................................ 282Vehicle data recording and

privacy..................................... 304Vehicle detected ahead.............. 115Vehicle dimensions .................... 291Vehicle Identification Number .... 280Vehicle jack................................ 252Vehicle messages ..................... 123Vehicle personalisation ............. 125

Vehicle security............................ 36Vehicle specific data ...................... 3Vehicle storage........................... 228Vehicle tools............................... 252Vehicle unlocking ........................... 6Vehicle weight ........................... 289Ventilating..................................... 54Ventilation................................... 147

WWarning chimes ......................... 124Warning lights............................. 104Warning triangle .......................... 86Washer and wiper systems ......... 14Washer fluid ............................... 232Wheel changing ......................... 264Wheel covers ............................. 260Wheels and tyres ....................... 254Windows....................................... 41Windscreen................................... 41Windscreen wiper/washer ........... 92Winter tyres ............................... 254Wiper blade replacement .......... 234

www.opel.com

Copyright by ADAM OPEL GmbH, Rüsselsheim, Germany.

The information contained in this publication is effective as of the date indicated below. Adam Opel GmbH reserves the right to make changes to the technical specifications, features anddesign of the vehicles relative to the information in this publication as well as changes to the publication itself.

Edition: August 2017, ADAM OPEL GmbH, Rüsselsheim.

Printed on chlorine-free bleached paper.

*ID-OASKOBSE1708-EN*

ID-OASKOBSE1708-en

Date post:	14-Aug-2021
Category:	Documents
Upload:	others
View:	0 times
Download:	0 times

Astra-K, v.11 (rev 4), en-GB - Opel Ireland · 2019. 10. 30. · Owner's Manual. Disregarding the...

Documents